Veeam ONE. Version 8.0. User Guide for VMware vsphere Environments

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Veeam ONE. Version 8.0. User Guide for VMware vsphere Environments"

Transcription

1 Veeam ONE Version 8.0 User Guide for VMware vsphere Environments July, 2015

2 2015 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means, without written permission from Veeam Software (Veeam). The information contained in this document represents the current view of Veeam on the issue discussed as of the date of publication and is subject to change without notice. Veeam shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Veeam makes no warranties, express or implied, in this document. Veeam may have patents, patent applications, trademark, copyright, or other intellectual property rights covering the subject matter of this document. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Except as expressly provided in any written license agreement from Veeam, the furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents, trademarks, copyrights, or other intellectual property. Important! Please read the End User Software License Agreement before using the accompanying software program(s). Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the End User Software License Agreement. 2 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

3 CONTENTS CONTENTS...3 CONTACTING VEEAM SOFTWARE...7 ABOUT THIS GUIDE...8 ABOUT VEEAM ONE...9 VEEAM ONE MONITOR ACCESSING VEEAM ONE MONITOR NAVIGATING VEEAM ONE MONITOR Toolbar Inventory Pane Information Pane Actions Pane Configuration Issues Pane System Tray Icon Full Screen Mode CONFIGURING VEEAM ONE MONITOR Connecting Servers Excluding Hosts from Monitoring Excluding Datastores from Reporting Configuring Notification Settings Configuring Veeam ONE Monitor Settings Managing License WORKING WITH ALARMS About Alarms Managing Alarms Configuring Alarm Notification Settings Modelling Alarm Number Monitoring Alarms Internal Alarms VIRTUAL INFRASTRUCTURE MONITORING Virtual Infrastructure Summary Dashboards Virtual Infrastructure Alarms Virtual Infrastructure Performance Charts List of Virtual Machines Top VMs, Top Hosts and Lowest Load Dashboards Virtual Infrastructure Tasks & Events Host Hardware State VM Console In-Guest Processes Launching vsphere Client VCLOUD DIRECTOR MONITORING vcloud Director Summary Dashboards vcloud Director Alarms vcloud Director Performance Charts Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

4 vcloud Director Resources Tracking Blocking Tasks Troubleshooting Virtual Machine Performance BUSINESS VIEW MONITORING Business View Summary Dashboards Business View Alarms Business View Performance Charts Troubleshooting Performance of Categorized Objects DATA PROTECTION MONITORING Data Protection Summary Dashboards Data Protection Alarms Data Protection Performance Charts Veeam Backup & Replication Jobs Viewing the List of VMs in Backups Monitoring Veeam Backup & Replication Events GENERATING REPORTS VEEAM ONE REPORTER ACCESSING VEEAM ONE REPORTER NAVIGATING VEEAM ONE REPORTER CONFIGURING VEEAM ONE REPORTER Configuration Summary Servers Extension Modules Viewing General Configuration Details DASHBOARDS Accessing Dashboards Creating Dashboards Setting Dashboard Preview Image and Color Scheduling Dashboards Publishing Dashboards Generating Direct Dashboard URL Sharing Dashboards Modifying Dashboards Deleting Dashboards Managing Widgets REPORTS Viewing Reports Saving Reports Modifying Reports Organizing Reports Scheduling Reports Copying Reports Deleting Reports Publishing Reports Generating Direct Report URL DEPLOYMENT PROJECTS Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

5 Getting Started with Deployment Projects Creating Deployment Projects Building Deployment Projects Viewing Deployment Project Report Completing Deployment Projects Modifying Deployment Projects Deleting Deployment Projects Adjusting Performance Thresholds Deployment Project States BUSINESS VIEW REPORTING VEEAM ONE BUSINESS VIEW ABOUT VEEAM ONE BUSINESS VIEW Categorization Model Business View Integration Data Collection ACCESSING VEEAM ONE BUSINESS VIEW NAVIGATING VEEAM ONE BUSINESS VIEW CONFIGURING VEEAM ONE BUSINESS VIEW Configuring Categorization Scheme Configuring Import and Export Settings Configuring Options CATEGORIZING VI OBJECTS Assigning Categorization Values Confirming Categorization Exporting Object Data to Excel WORKING WITH DASHBOARDS APPENDICES APPENDIX A. ALARM RULES AND EVENTS Veeam Backup & Replication Alarms Internal Alarms Alarm Rules APPENDIX B. VEEAM ONE SETTINGS UTILITY General Settings Reporter Settings Monitor Settings Deployment Configuration Exporting Logs APPENDIX C. CUSTOM CHARTS FOR REPORT-BASED WIDGETS Presentation of Data in Charts Aggregate Functions in Charts Exploded Pie Charts Clustered Column Charts Stacked Columns Chart APPENDIX D. SCHEDULING SCRIPT EXAMPLES Example A. Copying a Report to Network Shares Example B. Sorting Reports by Name Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

6 APPENDIX E. GROUPING EXPRESSIONS SYNTAX AND EXAMPLES Example 1. Group VMs by Guest Operating System Example 2. Group Datastores by Type Example 3. Group Hosts by Amount of Physical Memory Example 4. Group VMs by Department using Nested Methods APPENDIX F. SAMPLE SYNCHRONIZATION SCRIPT INDEX Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

7 CONTACTING VEEAM SOFTWARE At Veeam Software we value the feedback from our customers. It is important not only to help you quickly with your technical issues, but it is our mission to listen to your input, and build products that incorporate your suggestions. Customer Support Should you have a technical concern, suggestion or question, please visit our Customer Center Portal at cp.veeam.com to open a case, search our knowledge base, reference documentation, manage your license or obtain the latest product release. Online Support If you have any questions about Veeam ONE, you can use the following resources: Full documentation set at Community forum at forums.veeam.com Company Contacts For the most up-to-date information about company contacts and office locations, please visit 7 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

8 ABOUT THIS GUIDE This user guide provides information about main features and use of Veeam ONE in VMware vsphere environments. The document applies to version 8.0 and all subsequent versions until it is replaced with a new document. The document provides detailed configuration and usage guidelines for the three Veeam ONE components: Veeam ONE Monitor, Veeam ONE Reporter and Veeam ONE Business View. Intended Audience The guide is designed for anyone who plans to use the Veeam ONE solution. It is primarily aimed at administrators managing VMware vsphere environments, but can also be helpful for other current and perspective Veeam ONE users. Document Revision History Revision # Date Change Summary Revision 1 6/11/2014 Initial version of the document for Veeam ONE 8.0. Revision 2 8/12/2014 Updates in sections Data Protection Monitoring, fixed typos, formatting changes. Revision 3 29/1/2015 Fixed control names in section Appendix B. Veeam ONE Settings Utility. Revision 4 8/4/2015 Fixed typos in section Other Settings. Revision 5 20/7/2015 Updates in section Connecting Veeam Backup & Replication Servers; added information on server connection in Veeam ONE Free Edition. 8 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

9 ABOUT VEEAM ONE Veeam ONE is a management solution for virtual environments of any scale and complexity. It delivers real-time monitoring on health and performance of virtual environments, helps analyze the efficiency of data protection implemented with Veeam Backup & Replication, provides intelligent reporting and offers business-based views of the virtual infrastructure topology to simplify management and expedite decision-making. Veeam ONE incorporates three components: Veeam ONE Monitor is the primary tool used for monitoring your virtual environment and Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure. In the Veeam ONE Monitor console, you can manage, view and interact with alarms and monitoring data, analyze performance of virtual infrastructure and backup infrastructure components, keep an eye on the efficiency of data protection operations in your virtual environment, troubleshot issues that occur in your virtual environment, generate reports and administer monitoring settings. Veeam ONE Reporter helps you verify configuration issues, optimize resource allocation and utilization, track implemented changes, plan capacity growth and track whether missioncritical VMs are properly protected in the virtualized datacenter. Veeam ONE Business View allows you to group your virtual infrastructure objects into such categories as SLA, business unit, purpose, configuration entity, or any other. Your business categorization model is further applied to the monitoring and reporting functionality to simplify management and ensure transparency of operations for your business across large virtual environments. Veeam ONE Monitor, Veeam ONE Reporter and Veeam ONE Business View are installed with one setup and provide a single cohesive solution. Veeam ONE components integrate with each other in a number of areas described below. Server Connections To collect information about your virtual infrastructure and track the efficiency of VM data protection, you must configure connections to VMware, vcloud Director virtual management servers and Veeam Backup & Replication servers in Veeam ONE. You can connect servers either during installation or configure connections later, in the Veeam ONE Monitor console. Configured connection settings are automatically propagated to all Veeam ONE components. For example, if you connect a vcenter Server in Veeam ONE Monitor, it automatically becomes available in Veeam ONE Reporter and Veeam ONE Business View. Thus, there is no need to configure connections to virtual servers and Veeam Backup & Replication servers for every Veeam ONE component individually. When you change connection settings for a server, the changes are adapted across all components. When you remove a server from Veeam ONE Monitor, Veeam ONE automatically removes the server connection from all other components. Data Collection Veeam ONE components collect data from virtual infrastructure and Veeam Backup & Replication servers for monitoring, reporting and business categorization of your virtual environment: Veeam ONE Monitor gathers data from connected servers in real time. From connected vcenter Servers, ESX(i) hosts and vcloud Director servers, it collects performance, events, topology, configuration, audit and permissions data. From connected Veeam Backup & Replication servers, it collects topology, configuration, job session details and license information. Veeam ONE Reporter and Veeam ONE Business View share the same collection server that is responsible for collecting data from virtual infrastructure management servers and Veeam 9 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

10 Backup & Replication servers. From connected vcenter Servers, ESX(i) hosts and vcloud Director servers, the collection server gathers topology, configuration and categorization data. From connected Veeam Backup & Replication servers, it collects topology and configuration data. Collected data is stored to the same Veeam ONE database and shared by all Veeam ONE components. For example, Veeam ONE Reporter does not collect performance, audit and events data from virtual servers, or license information and job sessions from Veeam Backup & Replication servers. Instead, it uses data collected by Veeam ONE Monitor in real time. This eliminates the necessity to perform duplicate data collection and reduces the collection overhead on virtual and backup servers. License Management Veeam ONE uses one license for all of its components. The license file can be provided either during installation or after you install Veeam ONE. Veeam ONE propagates the license to components, so there is no need to manage the license for each component individually. For more information about Veeam ONE licensing, refer to Veeam ONE Deployment Guide. SMTP Server Settings Veeam ONE uses the same SMTP server settings for sending Veeam ONE Monitor and Veeam ONE Reporter notifications. SMTP server settings are defined in Veeam ONE Monitor, and are then automatically propagated to Veeam ONE Reporter. Thus, there is no need to perform configuration of notification settings for each component individually. Security Model Veeam ONE uses the same security model for all its components. To be able to access Veeam ONE Monitor, Veeam ONE Reporter or Veeam ONE Business View, the user must be included into one of Veeam ONE security groups on the machine where Veeam ONE is installed Veeam ONE Administrators or View ONE Read-Only Users. For more information on security groups and privileges, refer to Veeam ONE Deployment Guide. Multi-Tenant Monitoring and Reporting Veeam ONE supports multi-user access to its monitoring and reporting capabilities. Authorized users can concurrently access the same instance of Veeam ONE to monitor the health state of the virtual infrastructure and create reports. To restrict access to sensitive infrastructure data, you can limit the scope of virtual infrastructure objects and associated data that must be available to a Veeam ONE user. Thus you can control what subset of the managed virtual infrastructure the user can see and work with. In multi-tenant environments, you can configure restricted access to Veeam ONE for owners of virtualized systems or responsible personnel and delegate monitoring and reporting tasks. For details on configuring user access, see Veeam ONE Multi-Tenant Monitoring and Reporting. Business Categorization Veeam ONE Reporter and Veeam ONE Monitor integrate with Veeam ONE Business View out of the box. Veeam ONE Business View categorization model and category values assigned to virtual infrastructure objects are stored to the shared Veeam ONE database. Veeam ONE Monitor and Veeam ONE Reporter access and use this data for business-oriented monitoring and reporting. Thus, there is no need to perform any additional steps for integration with Veeam ONE Business View. 10 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

11 VEEAM ONE MONITOR Veeam ONE Monitor part of an integrated Veeam ONE solution is the primary tool for monitoring your VMware vsphere, vcloud Director environment and Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure. With Veeam ONE Monitor, you can manage, view and interact with alarms and monitoring data, analyze performance of virtual infrastructure objects, keep an eye on the efficiency of data protection implemented with Veeam Backup & Replication, generate reports and administer monitoring settings. Veeam ONE Monitor provides complete visibility of your virtual and backup infrastructure and helps you speed up troubleshooting and quickly isolate root causes of performance issues before users and services are affected. This chapter covers functionality available with Veeam ONE Monitor, provides guidelines for its initial configuration and describes possibilities for monitoring you VMware vsphere, vcloud Director and efficiency of data protection with Veeam Backup & Replication. Accessing Veeam ONE Monitor To start working with Veeam ONE Monitor, open the Veeam ONE Monitor console locally, on the machine where the Veeam ONE Monitor Client component is installed. To do so, in the Windows Programs menu choose Veeam ONE Monitor. To be able to work with the Veeam ONE Monitor functionality, a user must either: Be a member of the Veeam ONE Administrators or Veeam ONE Read-Only Users group (these are user groups created on the machine where the Veeam ONE Server component is installed). Have permissions assigned on objects of the vcenter Server or vcloud Director inventory hierarchy. For details, see Veeam ONE Multi-Tenant Monitoring and Reporting. 11 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

12 Navigating Veeam ONE Monitor Veeam ONE Monitor user interface is designed to let you quickly find commands you need, facilitate monitoring of your virtual environment and speed up the investigation and troubleshooting process. In this section, you can learn about basic elements of the Veeam ONE Monitor user interface. Toolbar Veeam ONE Monitor toolbar provides access to frequently used commands. Back/Forward navigate to the previous/next visited view in the Veeam ONE Monitor console. Refresh retrieve the latest collected data from the Veeam ONE Monitoring Server to show up-to-date information in the Veeam ONE Monitor console. You can press [F5] on your keyboard to perform this command. Add Server connect a new virtual infrastructure server, vcloud Director or Veeam Backup & Replication server. You can press [CTRL+I] on your keyboard to perform this command. For details, see Connecting Servers. Notifications open the Veeam ONE Monitor Configuration Wizard. For details, see Configuring Notification Settings. Reports create a report for an infrastructure object selected in the inventory pane. For details, see Creating Reports. Modelling forecast the number of alarms that will be triggered for an infrastructure object selected in the inventory pane. For details, see Modelling Alarm Number. Options view or change Veeam ONE Monitor client and server settings. For details, see Configuring Veeam ONE Monitor Settings. Help open Veeam ONE Monitor help, view license information or change the license file, export log files, check the current version of Veeam ONE Monitor. You can press the [F1] on your keyboard to open help topics. Full Screen switch to the full screen mode. You can press the [F11] on your keyboard to perform this command. For details, see Full Screen Mode. Search search for a virtual infrastructure, Business View, vcloud Director or backup infrastructure component (depending on the selected view). 12 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

13 Inventory Pane The inventory pane on the left shows hierarchical lists of virtual infrastructure objects, vcloud Director objects and Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure objects. To expand/collapse all tree nodes, right-click the root node in the inventory pane and choose Expand all/collapse all from the shortcut menu. To show all objects with errors and warnings in the hierarchy, right-click the root node in the inventory pane and choose Show all error objects from the shortcut menu. Veeam ONE Monitor will expand all nodes that have child objects with registered errors or warnings. To hide and show the inventory pane, use the collapse/expand arrow to the right of the inventory pane. Each node in the hierarchy tree reflects the state of a corresponding infrastructure object. If there exist unresolved alarms for the object, Veeam ONE Monitor displays on the node an icon of an alarm with the highest severity. Veeam ONE Monitor also reflects the state of child objects on parent nodes to let you easily find problematic objects. For example, if an error alarm was triggered for a host, the error icon will be displayed on the host node. In addition, a red downward error will be shown on the parent cluster node and on the parent management server node to indicate that an error has occurred on the child host. If necessary, you can change Veeam ONE Monitor client settings to display icons next to affected objects only. For details on changing display settings, see Other Settings. The buttons at the bottom of the inventory pane allow you to switch between Veeam ONE Monitor views. 13 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

14 Infrastructure View The Infrastructure View tree displays a hierarchical list of virtual infrastructure objects vcenter Servers, clusters, hosts, folders, virtual machines, datastores and so on. It shows the virtual infrastructure in inventory terms, similar to vcenter Server topology presentation. If you connect a vcloud Director server to Veeam ONE Monitor, the Infrastructure View inventory tree will display vcenter Servers attached to vcloud Director and vcloud Director VMs. To hide vcloud Director VMs from the Infrastructure View inventory, you can enable the Hide vcloud Director VMs from Virtual Infrastructure tree option in Veeam ONE server settings. For details, see Other Settings. vcloud Director View The vcloud Director View tree displays a hierarchical list of vcloud Director objects provider VDCs, organizations, organization VDCs, vapps and VMs. 14 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

15 Business View The Business View tree displays a hierarchical list of categorization groups configured in Veeam ONE Business View. It presents the virtual infrastructure topology in business terms and allows you to monitor, alert and report on custom categorization units in your virtual environment. By default, Veeam ONE Monitor hides the Uncategorized group for all Business View categories in the inventory tree. To make it available in the Business View hierarchy, you can disable the Hide uncategorized objects from the Business View tree option in Veeam ONE server settings. For details on changing Business View display settings, see Other Settings. Data Protection View The Data Protection View tree displays a hierarchical list of connected Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager servers, Veeam Backup & Replication servers and components of your backup infrastructure backup proxies, backup repositories, WAN Accelerators, tape servers, cloud repositories and cloud gateways. 15 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

16 Alarm Management The Alarm Management tree displays the list of available alarm types. Use the Alarm Management view to manage predefined alarms or create new alarms. For details, see Managing Alarms. 16 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

17 Information Pane The information pane is the main working area used for managing alarms, viewing performance data and accomplishing other operations for monitoring your virtual environment and data protection environment. Tabs in the information pane allow you to switch between Veeam ONE Monitor dashboards. The set of available dashboards varies depending on the object that is selected in the inventory tree. 17 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

18 Actions Pane The Actions pane on the right displays links to tasks and commands that can be initiated by the user. The pane becomes available when you open the Alarms monitoring tab or switch to the Alarm Management view. You can hide and show the pane using the collapse/expand arrows. Applicability of actions depends on the type of object you select in the inventory tree or on the type of an alarm you select in the information pane. For example, if you select a VM in the inventory pane and open the list of triggered alarms for this VM, all alarm actions, object actions and navigation actions will be available in the Actions pane. If you select a storage object in the inventory pane, some navigation actions will be disabled as they do not apply to storage objects. For more information on working with alarm actions, see Monitoring Alarms. In a similar manner, if you open the Alarm Management section and select multiple alarms in the list, some of the actions like Edit assignment and Edit excludes will become unavailable, as these actions cannot be performed in batch. For more information on alarm management actions, see Managing Alarms. Configuration Issues Pane The Configuration issues pane displays information on alarms that fired as a result of internal Veeam ONE Monitor configuration issues (such as lost connection to a virtual server, data collection failure, license expiration and so on). To view details of internal alarms, click the Show details link at the top right corner of the pane. For more information on working with internal configuration alarms, see Monitoring Internal Alarms. 18 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

19 System Tray Icon To facilitate monitoring of your virtual infrastructure, Veeam ONE Monitor adds its icon to the system tray as the status indicator. If the virtual and data protection infrastructure are functioning properly, the icon color will be green. If a warning or error is triggered, the color will turn yellow and red, correspondingly. As soon as health state of your virtual and data protection infrastructure returns to normal, the color changes back to green. To learn about the number of warnings and errors that occurred, move the cursor over the icon. Full Screen Mode The full screen mode allows you to display only the information pane for the selected object, without unnecessary interface elements that may distract your attention. To switch to full screen mode, do one of the following: Press [F11] on the keyboard Click the Full Screen button in the toolbar In the full screen mode, the toolbar is not displayed at all, which allows you to concentrate on monitoring the virtual environment state and have only the most crucial information displayed. You can collapse and expand the inventory pane and actions pane if necessary. To exit full screen mode, click the Exit Full Screen button in the top right corner or press [F11] on the keyboard. 19 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

20 Configuring Veeam ONE Monitor To start working with the Veeam ONE Monitor, perform a number of steps for its initial configuration: 1. Connect servers you plan to monitor. You can connect Veeam Backup & Replication servers, VMware vsphere servers and vcloud Director servers. This step is not required if you have already connected the default virtual infrastructure and backup infrastructure server during Veeam ONE installation. 2. Exclude non-critical hosts from monitoring. By default, Veeam ONE monitors all hosts that are managed by connected virtual infrastructure servers. If you do not want to obtain alarms and track the health state of specific hosts, you can exclude these hosts from the monitoring scope. 3. Exclude non-critical datastores from reporting. By default, Veeam ONE includes in reports all datastores that are managed by connected virtual infrastructure servers. If you do not want to report on specific datastores, you can exclude these datastores from the reporting scope. 4. Configure notification settings. Specify notification settings to stay aware of all important events and changes that happen in your virtual and backup environment. 5. Check client and server settings. Review and adjust Veeam ONE Monitor client and server settings if required. 20 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

21 Connecting Servers To collect data about the managed environment, you need to configure connections to virtual infrastructure and backup infrastructure servers. You can connect the following types of servers to Veeam ONE Monitor: VMware vsphere Servers vcloud Director Servers Veeam Backup & Replication Servers Before You Begin Before you configure server connections, check these requirements: Supported versions of virtual platforms Supported versions and editions of Veeam Backup & Replication Requirements to accounts used for collecting data Ports that must be open to allow Veeam ONE collect data from connected servers For details, see Veeam ONE Deployment Guide. 21 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

22 Connecting VMware vsphere Servers To collect data about VMware vsphere infrastructure objects, you need to configure connections to VMware vsphere servers in Veeam ONE Monitor. You can connect the following types of servers: vcenter Servers Standalone ESX(i) hosts To configure a connection to a VMware vsphere server, take the following steps. Step 1. Launch the Add Server Wizard To launch the Add Server wizard, do one of the following: Click the Add Server button on the toolbar. Press [CTRL+I] on the keyboard. Open the Infrastructure View, right-click the Virtual Infrastructure node in the inventory pane and choose Add Server from the shortcut menu. Step 2. Choose Server Type At the first step of the wizard, click VMware server. 22 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

23 Step 3. Specify Server Name and Role At the Name step of the wizard: 1. Enter DNS name or IP address of the server that will be connected to Veeam ONE Monitor. 2. Specify the server role vcenter Server or a standalone ESX(i) host. Step 4. Specify Credentials At the Credentials step of the wizard: 1. Specify credentials of the user account for connecting to the server. For vcenter Server, the user name must be specified in the DOMAIN\USERNAME format. 2. Change the port number if required. By default, port 443 is used for communication with VMware vsphere servers. 23 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

24 Step 5. Verify Connection Settings At the Summary step of the wizard, review the connection details and click Finish. Note that it may take a while for Veeam ONE Monitor to collect and display data for the connected server and its child objects. When you connect vcenter Server or an ESX host, Veeam ONE Monitor imports available historical performance data (for up to 3 months for vcenter Servers and for the last 24 hours for ESX hosts). After importing performance data, Veeam ONE Monitor performs incremental data collection in real time. When you connect standalone ESXi hosts (hosts that are not managed by vcenter Server), no historical performance data is imported. 24 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

25 Connecting vcloud Director Servers To collect data about vcloud Director infrastructure objects, you need to configure connections to vcloud Director servers in Veeam ONE Monitor. To configure a connection to a vcloud Director server, take the following steps. Step 1. Launch the Add Server Wizard To launch the Add Server wizard, do one of the following: Click the Add Server button on the toolbar. Press [CTRL+I] on the keyboard. Open the vcloud Director View, right-click the vcloud Infrastructure node in the inventory pane and choose Add Server. Step 2. Choose Server Type At the first step of the wizard, click VMware vcloud Director. 25 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

26 Step 3. Specify Server Name At the Name step of the wizard: 1. Enter DNS or IP address of the vcloud Director server that will be connected to Veeam ONE Monitor. 2. Change vcloud Director URL if required. Veeam ONE Monitor populates the URL field with a URL used for connecting to the vcloud Director server. The URL format is where <vcdservername> is the DNS name or IP address of the vcloud Director server, and 443 is the default port. If you use port number other than 443, you can change it in the URL field. Step 4. Specify Credentials for vcloud Director At the Credentials step of the wizard, specify credentials for the user account for connecting to the vcloud Director server. 26 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

27 Step 5. Specify Credentials for Underlying vcenter Servers At the vcenter Credentials step of the wizard, specify credentials for each vcenter Server attached to vcloud Director. By default, Veeam ONE Monitor uses the same credentials that you have specified at the Credentials step of the wizard. However, if the underlying vcenter Servers should be connected under another user account, you can set the credentials for each vcenter Server manually: 1. In the vcenter Credentials list, select a vcenter Server. 2. Click Set User and specify credentials to connect to the vcenter Server. Click the browse button to the right of the Username field to search for a local or domain user or group. 3. Repeat steps 1-2 for all vcenter Servers attached to vcloud Director. To test if connection settings are configured correctly, click the Check Connection button. Veeam ONE Monitor will attempt to establish connection with the vcenter Servers using the provided credentials. Step 6. Verify Connection Settings At the Summary step of the wizard, review the connection details and click Finish. The vcloud Director hierarchy will become available in the vcloud Director View. Note that it may take a while for Veeam ONE Monitor to collect and display data for the newly added vcloud Director and its child objects. 27 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

28 When you connect vcloud Director, Veeam ONE Monitor also connects underlying vcenter Servers and initiates data import. vcenter Servers become available in the Infrastructure View, and you can work with them as with regular VMware vsphere infrastructure servers. If the vcenter Server attached to vcloud Director is already connected, Veeam ONE Monitor will simply create an association between the vcloud Director hierarchy and the vcenter Server. 28 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

29 Connecting Veeam Backup & Replication Servers To collect data about your backup infrastructure and data protection operations, you need to configure connections to Veeam Backup & Replication servers in Veeam ONE Monitor. You can connect the following types of servers: Veeam Backup & Replication server to monitor standalone backup servers Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager to monitor all backup servers federated under Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager Important! Generally, you cannot connect Veeam Backup and Replication servers in Veeam ONE Free Edition. If you try to do so, the application will prompt you to purchase a full version of the product. However, if your Veeam Backup and Replication license covers Veeam Cloud Connect only and does not cover any Hyper-V nor VMware vsphere sockets, you will be able to connect this Veeam Backup and Replication server in Veeam ONE Free Edition. To configure a connection to a Veeam Backup & Replication server, take the following steps. Step 1. Launch the Add Server Wizard To launch the Add Server wizard, do one of the following: Click the Add Server button on the toolbar. Press [CTRL+I] on the keyboard. Open the Data Protection View, right-click the Backup Infrastructure node in the inventory pane and choose Add Server from the shortcut menu. Step 2. Choose Server Type At the first step of the wizard, click Veeam Backup & Replication server. 29 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

30 Step 3. Specify Server Name and Role At the Name step of the wizard: 1. Enter DNS name or IP address of the backup server that will be connected to Veeam ONE Monitor. 2. Specify the server role Veeam Backup & Replication server or Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager. If you choose to add Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager, Veeam ONE will automatically connect all Veeam Backup & Replication servers added to the Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager. Step 4. Specify Credentials At the Credentials step of the wizard, specify credentials of the user account for connecting to the server. The user name should be specified in the DOMAIN\USERNAME format. The provided credentials will be used to connect the backup server and all managed servers in the backup infrastructure: Veeam Backup & Replication servers (if you connect Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager) Backup proxies Backup repositories 30 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

31 WAN Accelerators Tape servers Cloud Gateways If the provided user account does not have required permissions on a managed backup infrastructure server, Veeam ONE Monitor will fail to connect to this server. In this case, you will need to provide custom connection credentials manually, as described in section Changing Server Connection Settings. Step 5. Verify Connection Settings At the Summary step of the wizard, review the connection details and click Finish. Note that it may take a while for Veeam ONE Monitor to collect and display configuration and performance data for the newly added backup server and managed backup infrastructure components. After you connect a Veeam Backup & Replication server, Veeam ONE Monitor imports data on job sessions for the previous week. After you connect a Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager, Veeam ONE Monitor automatically builds the hierarchy of all managed backup servers. Next, it connects managed backup servers and imports from these servers data on job sessions for the previous week. 31 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

32 Changing Server Connection Settings In some situations, you might need to change connection settings for a monitored server. Consider the following examples: If you need to re-connect a server with another user name and/or password, you can change connection settings for this server. If the account you provided for a Veeam backup server does not have sufficient permissions to collect data from all backup infrastructure components, you can set custom connection settings for specific servers in your backup infrastructure. To change connection settings for a server: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View or Data Protection View. 2. In the inventory pane, right-click the server and choose Connection Settings from the shortcut menu. 3. Edit the user name, enter the password and/or change the port number (if applicable). Notes When changing connection settings, mind the following: When you change connection settings for a virtual infrastructure server, Veeam ONE Monitor disconnects the server and re-connects it with the new settings. When a virtual server is disconnected, previously discovered VMs remain available in the inventory tree. After the server is re-connected, its performance data will be updated. If the connection is not restored, only the history of performance data will be available in Veeam ONE Monitor. When you change connection settings for a backup server in the Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager hierarchy, a new job is automatically configured in Veeam ONE Reporter to collect data from this backup server. 32 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

33 Removing Server Connections If you no longer want to monitor a virtual infrastructure or a backup server, you can remove a connection to it in Veeam ONE Monitor. To remove a server connection: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View or Data Protection View. 2. In the inventory pane, right-click the server you want to remove and choose Remove Server from the shortcut menu. After you remove a server connection in Veeam ONE Monitor, connection to this server will be automatically removed in Veeam ONE Reporter. Notes When removing server connection, mind the following: When you remove a server, historical performance and configuration data for the server and its child objects is deleted from the Veeam ONE database. When you remove vcloud Director, Veeam ONE Monitor withdraws connection to vcloud Director server only. Connections to underlying vcenter Servers are not removed automatically you must remove these connections manually. 33 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

34 Excluding Hosts from Monitoring After you connect to vcenter Server, Veeam ONE Monitor automatically includes in the monitoring scope all hosts managed by this server. If you do not need to monitor some of the managed hosts, you can exclude these hosts from the monitoring scope: 1. Click Options on the toolbar and choose Server Settings. Alternatively, press the [CTRL+S] on the keyboard. 2. In the Server Settings window, open the Monitored Hosts tab. 3. Expand the virtual infrastructure hierarchy under the connected vcenter Server and clear check boxes next to hosts that should be excluded from monitoring. 34 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

35 Excluding Datastores from Reporting After you connect a new VMware vsphere server in Veeam ONE Monitor, all datastores attached to this server are added to the data collection scope. If you do not need to collect data about specific datastores (for example, local datastores or datastores with ISO images), you can exclude these datastores from the collection scope. Excluding datastores will accelerate completion of a data collection sessions. Excluded datastores will not be reflected in several reports that analyze and list the files residing on datastores (such as the Garbage Files and Idle Templates reports). To exclude one or more datastores from the collection scope: 1. Click Options on the toolbar and choose Server Settings. Alternatively, press the [CTRL+S] on the keyboard. 2. In the Server Settings window, open the Monitored Datastores tab. 3. Expand the virtual infrastructure hierarchy and select check boxes next to datastores you want to exclude. 4. Click Exclude to apply changes. 35 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

36 Configuring Notification Settings When you open Veeam ONE Monitor console for the first time, you will be prompted to configure notification settings in the Configuration Wizard. Veeam ONE uses these settings for sending notifications and SNMP traps generated by Veeam ONE Monitor and Veeam ONE Reporter. To configure notification settings, take the following steps. Tip: To suppress the wizard, select the Skip notifications configuration check box. To access the wizard later on, you can use the Notifications button on the toolbar. Alternatively, you can configure notifications by changing Veeam ONE Monitor Server settings. Step 1. Configure SMTP Server Settings At the SMTP Server step of the wizard, configure SMTP server settings. Veeam ONE will use provided SMTP server settings for notifications generated by both Veeam ONE Monitor and Veeam ONE Reporter. In the SMTP Server field, enter DNS name or IP address of the SMTP server that will be used for sending notifications. All Veeam ONE notifications (including test messages), automatically generated reports and dashboards will be sent by this SMTP server. Change the SMTP communication port if required. In the Send from field, enter the address of the notification sender. If your SMTP server requires authentication, select the User authentication check box and specify authentication credentials in the Login account and Password fields. For SMTP server with SSL support, select Enable SSL security to enable SSL data encryption. You can send out a test to make sure that SMTP Server settings are configured correctly: 1. Click Send Test Enter an address at which a test notification should be sent. 3. Click OK. A test will be sent at the specified address. 36 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

37 Step 2. Configure Notification Settings At the Notifications step of the wizard, create a list of recipients to include in the default notification group. For every recipient in the group, specify notification conditions. The default notification group allows you to simplify the process of configuring alarm notification settings. Instead of specifying notification recipients for every alarm, you can create a group of recipients (for example, monitoring operators and administrators) and notify the whole group when an alarm is triggered or when an alarm changes its status. To add a recipient to the default notification group: 1. In the Specify notification recipient to add field, enter an address of a recipient and click Add. 2. From the Notification Level list, choose the severity of notifications that the recipient will receive: Any state an notification will be sent every time when an alarm status changes to Error, Warning or Info. Errors and warnings an notification will be sent every time when an alarm status changes to Error or Warning. Errors only an notification will be sent every time when an alarm status changes to Error. 37 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

38 To remove a recipient from the list, select an address in the list and click Remove. To temporarily disable notifications for specific recipients, clear check boxes next to necessary addresses in the list. Important! By default, all predefined alarms are configured to notify members of the default notification group in accordance with the specified notification level. After you add recipients to the default notification group, you might need to change alarm settings or adjust the default notification frequency. To learn how to specify alarm settings, see Creating Alarms > Step 5. Specify Alarm Actions. Step 3. Configure Frequency At the Frequency step of the wizard, specify how often Veeam ONE Monitor should send notifications about alarms. The frequency at which notifications are sent is defined with the help of notification policies. Veeam ONE Monitor offers two notification policies: Mission Critical if this notification policy is used, Veeam ONE Monitor creates a new notification for every alarm. You get an instant notification once a new alarm is triggered, or once alarm status is changed. Other if this notification policy is used, Veeam ONE Monitor sends out an notification about alarms once in a specific time interval (by default, once in 30 minutes). You do not receive a separate notification for every alarm. Instead, every 30 minutes you receive one notification about all alarms that were triggered or that changed their status since the latest notification. By default, the Mission Critical policy is applied to all objects in your virtual infrastructure, vcloud Director infrastructure and all objects in your backup infrastructure. If necessary, you can apply different notification policy settings to infrastructure objects or Business View groups: 1. Remove effective notification policy settings for chosen infrastructure objects. 2. Apply new notification policy settings to chosen infrastructure objects or Business View groups. For example, if you want to receive notifications about problems in the backup environment once within 30 minutes, you must first remove the Mission Critical policy settings for backup infrastructure objects, and then apply the Other policy settings to backup infrastructure objects. 38 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

39 Removing Effective Notification Policy Settings Before applying new notification policy settings, you must remove the effective settings for the chosen type of infrastructure objects: 1. Select the necessary policy in the list and click Edit. 2. In the Edit Policy window, select the necessary type of infrastructure objects and click Remove. Applying Notification Policy Settings To apply new notification policy settings to infrastructure objects or Business View groups: 1. Select the necessary policy in the list and click Edit. 2. In the Edit Policy window, click Add and choose one of the following options: 3. Click Add. Infrastructure Tree browse the virtual infrastructure hierarchy and select check boxes next to objects or infrastructure segments to which the policy settings should apply. Business View browse the Business View hierarchy and select check boxes next to groups or infrastructure objects to which the policy settings should apply. Data Protection View browse the backup infrastructure and select check boxes next to infrastructure components to which the policy settings should apply. vcloud Director View browse the vcloud infrastructure and select check boxes next to infrastructure components to which the policy settings should apply. 4. [Only for policy 'Other'] In the Time interval to send summary (minutes) field, specify how often Veeam ONE Monitor must send out a summary informing about triggered alarms. 5. Click OK. 39 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

40 Tip: You can also change the notification policy settings by adjusting Veeam ONE Monitor Server notification settings. 40 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

41 Step 4. Configure SNMP Settings At the SNMP Settings step of the wizard, specify trap notification settings that can be used for sending notifications about alarms. To specify SNMP receiver configuration settings: 1. Click Configure to open the SNMP receiver configuration window. 2. In the Receiver field, specify DNS name or IP address of the SNMP receiver. 3. In the Port field, specify the port number to be used. 4. In the Community String field, enter the community identifier. 5. Click OK to apply the specified settings. 6. In the list of SNMP receivers, choose the version of the SNMP protocol to be used. To add a new receiver to the list, click Add Receiver and perform steps 1-6 described above. Note that after you configure notification settings, you must configure SNMP service properties on the trap recipients computers: 41 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

42 1. Install a standard Microsoft SNMP agent from the Windows distribution. 2. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 3. Double-click SNMP Service to open the SNMP Service Properties window. 4. Click the Traps tab. 5. Add the public string to the Community name list and the host name to the Trap destinations list. 6. Click the Security tab. 7. Make sure the Send authentication trap option is selected. 8. Add the public string to the Accepted community names list. 9. Select the Accept SNMP packets from any hosts option. 10. Click Apply and then OK to accept changes. Note: By default, Veeam ONE alarms are not configured to send SNMP traps when the alarm state changes. To enable SNMP traps for an alarm, you should change alarm action settings. For details, see Creating Alarms > Step 5. Specify Alarm Actions.. Step 5. Review Summary Review configured notification settings and click Finish. 42 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

43 Configuring Veeam ONE Monitor Settings You can customize the default settings of the Veeam ONE Monitor Client and Veeam ONE Monitor Server components. Veeam ONE Monitor Client Settings Veeam ONE Monitor Client settings specify user preferences, such as display preferences and color scheme for performance charts, and other. To access client settings, click Options on the toolbar select Client Settings. Alternatively, you can press [CTRL+O] on the keyboard. General Settings On the General tab, you can specify DNS name or IP address of a machine where the Veeam ONE Monitor Server component is installed. To access this tab, you can right-click the Virtual Infrastructure node in the inventory pane and select Connect to another server from the shortcut menu. If Veeam ONE is installed using the typical deployment scenario, the Veeam ONE Monitor Server field is populated automatically with the Veeam ONE machine name. If Veeam ONE is installed using the advanced deployment scenario, or if you have an instance of Veeam ONE Monitor Client installed on a separate computer, the Veeam ONE Monitor Server field is not populated automatically. The first time you open the Veeam ONE Monitor console, you will be requested to enter the name of the machine where the Veeam ONE Monitor Server component is installed. 43 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

44 Color Settings On the Colors tab, you can create a custom color scheme that will be used to display graphs on performance charts. You can add colors from the color palette, remove and edit existing colors, as well as sort them as required. Colors at the top of are used first for graphs on performance charts. 44 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

45 Chart Settings On the Chart tab, you can customize display preferences for graphs on performance charts. You can choose to show graphs in 2D or 3D, as plain lines or filled areas. Graphic and Layer Type The following images illustrate how different combinations of line graphs and layer types will be reflected on performance charts: 2D line graphs with line layer 3D line graphs with line layer 45 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

46 2D line graphs with area layer 3D line graphs with area layer Auto-scale The Auto-scale option allows you to enable auto-scaling if you want to remove top lines from performance charts on the Overall tab. With auto-scale enabled, the Y-axis scales automatically, to match the range of the displayed data. Auto-scale disabled Auto-scale enabled 46 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

47 Other Settings On the Other tab, you can specify additional client options. Miscellaneous In the Miscellaneous section, you can specify the following settings: From the Logging level list, choose the level of detail for logging (Off, Low or High). Select the Minimize to tray check box if you want to hide Veeam ONE Monitor to a system tray icon whenever the Veeam ONE Monitor window is minimized. Clear the Show child object status on a parent node in the Infrastructure tree check box if every object in the Virtual Infrastructure tree should reflect its own state only. Remote Access If this check box is cleared, the state of child objects with errors and warnings will not be reflected on parent nodes. If this check box is selected, Veeam ONE Monitor will show downward arrows on parent nodes to reflect the problematic state of child objects. For details on displaying the infrastructure inventory tree, see Inventory Pane. In the Remote access section, you can specify the path to the PuTTy.exe file. Veeam ONE Monitor requires PuTTy to provide easy access to consoles of Linux-based VMs. For details on accessing VM console, see VM Console For information about PuTTY, see 47 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

48 Veeam ONE Monitor Server Settings Veeam ONE Monitor server settings specify application settings, such as mail and trap notification settings, notification policy settings, monitored objects, and other. To access server settings, click Options on the toolbar and select Server Settings. Alternatively, you can press [CTRL+S] on the keyboard. SMTP Settings On the SMTP Settings tab, you can configure mail settings that will be used for sending alarm notifications by . SMTP Server Settings You need to define SMTP settings only if you have not yet configured notification settings using the Configuration Wizard. Veeam ONE will use provided SMTP server settings for both Veeam ONE Monitor and Veeam ONE Reporter. For details on configuring SMTP settings, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 1. Configure SMTP Server Settings. You can send out a test to make sure that SMTP settings are configured correctly: 1. Click Send Test Enter an address at which a test notification should be sent. 3. Click OK. A test will be sent at the specified address. 48 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

49 Format In the format section, specify settings for notification templates: In the Send notifications in this format section, select an format HTML or plain text. Note that if you select to send notifications as plain text, you will not be able to append KB articles to alarm details. For details on specifying alarm KB details, see Creating Alarms > Step 7. Enter Alarm Details. Click the Configure button if you want to change the subject of the notification . The default subject includes details on the alarm name, name of the affected virtual infrastructure object and alarm status change. You can use the following parameters in the notification subject: %ALARM_NAME% name of the alarm %TIME% date and time when the alarm was triggered or when the alarm status changed %STATUS% current alarm status %OLD_STATUS% status of the alarm before its status was changed %OBJECT% affected infrastructure object %OBJECT_TYPE% type of the affected infrastructure object 49 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

50 Notification Policy On Notification Policy tab, you can configure the default notification group, set the necessary notification policies and specify other notification settings. Default Notification Group You need to specify the default notifications group settings only if you have not yet configured notification settings using the Configuration Wizard. In the Default notifications group section, specify addresses of recipients that will be included into the default notification group. For details on configuring default notification group, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 2. Configure Notification Settings. Notification Policies You need to specify settings in the notification policy settings only if you have not yet configured notification settings using the Configuration Wizard. In the notification policies section, specify how often Veeam ONE Monitor should send notifications when alarms are triggered in your virtual infrastructure. For details on configuring notification policies, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 3. Configure Frequency. Miscellaneous Use the Send notification when alarm metrics are back to normal check box to control whether you want to send notifications when alarm metrics that triggered the alarm return back to normal. Use the Send KB article check box to specify whether the notification should include KB details. If the check box is selected, Veeam ONE Monitor will append a KB article below the alarm details in the message. For details on specifying alarm KB details, see Creating Alarms > Step 7. Enter Alarm Details. Note: KB article will be included in notifications only if you have chosen HTML as the format in Veeam ONE Monitor SMTP settings. If you choose to send notifications as plain text, KB articles messages will not display KB details. 50 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

51 SNMP On the SNMP tab, you can specify trap notification settings for sending notifications about alarms. 1. Click Configure to open the SNMP receiver configuration window. 2. In the Receiver field, specify DNS name or IP address of the SNMP receiver. 3. In the Port field, specify the port number to be used. 4. In the Community String field, enter the community identifier. 5. Click OK to apply the specified settings. 6. In the list of SNMP receivers, choose the version of the SNMP protocol to be used. To add a new receiver to the list, click Add Receiver and perform steps 1-6 described above. 51 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

52 To remove a receiver from the list, select the check box to the right, and click Delete. Next, you should configure SNMP service properties on the trap recipients computers: 1. Install a standard Microsoft SNMP agent from the Windows distribution. 2. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 3. Double-click SNMP Service to open the SNMP Service Properties window. 4. Click the Traps tab. 5. Add the public string to the Community name list and a necessary host name to the Trap destinations list. 6. Click the Security tab. 7. Make sure the Send authentication trap option is selected. 8. Add the public string to the Accepted community names list. 9. Select the Accept SNMP packets from any hosts option. 10. Click Apply and then OK to accept changes. Monitored Hosts On the Monitored Hosts tab, you can select hosts that must be monitored and hosts that must be excluded from monitoring. For details, see Excluding Hosts from Monitoring. Monitored Datastores On the Monitored Datastores tab, you can select datastores that must be included in reports and datastores that must be excluded from reporting. For details, see Excluding Datastores from Reporting. 52 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

53 Other Settings On the Monitored Objects tab, you can specify miscellaneous application settings. Business View In the Business View section, you can control whether uncategorized objects must be shown in the Business View inventory tree. If the Hide uncategorized objects from the Business View tree check box is cleared, Veeam ONE Monitor will show the Uncategorized group for all categories in the Business View inventory tree. If the Hide uncategorized objects from the Business View tree check box is selected, Veeam ONE Monitor will hide the Uncategorized groups and all objects within these groups in the Business View inventory tree. For details on displaying the Business View inventory tree, see Business View. vcloud Director In the vcloud Director section, you can control whether vcloud Director VMs must be shown in the Infrastructure View inventory tree. If the Hide vcloud Director VMs from Virtual Infrastructure tree check box is cleared, vcloud Director VMs will be shown both in the vcloud Director View and in the Infrastructure View inventory trees. If the Hide vcloud Director VMs from Virtual Infrastructure tree check box is selected, vcloud Director VMs will be shown in the vcloud Director View inventory tree only. For details on displaying the virtual infrastructure inventory tree, see Infrastructure View. Notifications In the Notifications section, you can disable or enable notification messages about support contract expiration. If the Disable support contract expiration notifications check box is cleared, Veeam ONE will display notification messages in the UI. 53 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

54 If the Disable support contract expiration notifications check box is selected, Veeam ONE will not display notification messages in the UI. Note that this option does not disable internal alarms notifying about support expiration. For details on working with internal alarms, see Internal Alarms. Support Utility Click Launch in the Support utility section, to run the Veeam ONE Settings support utility. The Veeam ONE Settings utility allows you to change configuration settings of the Veeam ONE software components. For description of supported configuration settings, see Appendix B. Veeam ONE Settings Utility. Important! The Veeam ONE Settings utility must be used only under the guidance of Veeam Support. It is strongly recommended that you obtain detailed instructions from the Veeam Support team before changing any configuration settings in your Veeam ONE deployment. 54 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

55 Managing License In the process of Veeam ONE installation, you are asked provide a license file. If you provide a full or trial license, you will work with the licensed version featuring full application functionality. If you do not provide a license, you will work with the free version featuring limited application functionality. For details on free version limitations, check the Veeam ONE product webpage. To view information about the installed license or install the license: 1. Click Help on the toolbar and choose License Information. 2. To update the existing license or install a new license, click Install License and browse to the necessary.lic file. The license file you provide will be propagated to other Veeam ONE components. For more information on Veeam ONE licensing, see Veeam ONE Deployment Guide. 55 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

56 Working with Alarms Veeam ONE Monitor alarms are intended to inform about important events and changes in the managed virtual and backup environment. Alarms speed up the process of identifying, troubleshooting and reacting to critical issues that may affect mission critical services and business operations. Out of the box Veeam ONE comes with a set of predefined alarms, including: Predefined alarms for monitoring VMware vsphere environments and vcloud Director operations framework Veeam Backup & Replication alarms for monitoring connection status of backup infrastructure components, job state and duration, insufficient space on backup repositories, state of software components installed on backup infrastructure servers, and Veeam Backup & Replication license issues Internal alarms for monitoring data collection issues, problems with connection to managed servers, insufficient space for Veeam ONE database, license concerns All predefined alarms are based on best practices and include an extensive knowledge base. When a problem occurs, you will not only be alerted, but will also have all the necessary information for troubleshooting and finding the root cause of the issue. Depending on your requirements to the virtual and backup environment, you can customize predefined alarms, or create new alarms that will analyze performance and alert on errors at any infrastructure level. 56 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

57 About Alarms Veeam ONE offers an extensive set of rules and severity levels, allowing you to create your own elaborate alarm model. This section describes various aspects of alarms in Veeam ONE, including alarm rules, severity levels, assignment options, response actions and other. Alarm Rules Every alarm has one or more associated rules that define: Conditions under which the alarm must be triggered this can be an object state change or a generated event Severity of the alarm to trigger Alarm suppression settings Veeam ONE Monitor evaluates the state of monitored objects and the health of environment against alarm rules in real-time. If the criteria described with an alarm rule are met, Veeam ONE triggers the alarm with a corresponding severity level. Veeam ONE Monitor alarms are divided into several groups, or types, depending on the target object. For each type of alarms, there is its own set of alarm rules. For a list of available Veeam ONE rule types, see Appendix A. Alarm Rules and Events. Alarm Severity Every alarm rule is associated with one of alarm severity levels. The severity level defines criticality of the alarm and its impact on the object health state. Veeam ONE Monitor offers 4 severity levels that are color-coded as follows: Error (red) indicates a critical situation or a major problem that requires immediate action. Warning (yellow) indicates a potential problem or non-critical issue that needs your attention. If the issue is left without attention, it can potentially cause a major problem. Resolved (green) indicates that the issue is eliminated because of the changed conditions, or shows that the alarm was resolved manually. Information (blue) indicates general information about a specific condition, or health state of an object. You can define different severity levels for conditions of different intensity. For example, if the level of memory usage should not exceed 75%, you can create the following rules: If the memory usage is over 70%, an alarm with the Warning severity level will be triggered. If the memory usage is over 75%, an alarm with the Error severity level will be triggered. In such situation, if the memory usage level is constantly growing and exceeds 70%, Veeam ONE Monitor will trigger a warning alarm, notifying about a potentially dangerous situation. If the memory usage level keeps on growing and exceeds the level of 75%, Veeam ONE Monitor will trigger an error alarm notifying about severe danger. 57 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

58 Alarm Assignment Options There are a number of options for assigning alarms to infrastructure objects: Object-level assignment you can assign an alarm to single objects in your environment. This type of assignment can be useful if you need to customize alarms for specific objects, like separate hosts, virtual machines or backup infrastructure components. Group-level assignment you can assign an alarm to a group of objects at once (for example, to an infrastructure container or a Business View group). This type of assignment can be useful if you need to assign an alarm to all objects under a specific parent entity, for example, to all VMs residing on a host or to all backup proxies connected to a backup server. Infrastructure-level assignment you can assign an alarm to all objects of a particular type in the entire monitored environment. This is the default type of assignment used for all predefined alarms. You can combine various assignment levels if necessary. For example, an alarm can be assigned to all VMs running on a chosen host, to all VMs in a chosen Business View group and to a few single VMs at the same time. In addition to flexible alarm assignment options, Veeam ONE offers a possibility to exclude specific objects or object groups from the assignment scope. Thus, you can easily point out what part of your environment the alarm should "disregard". Alarm Actions When a new alarm is triggered, or alarm status is changed, you can choose to perform a specific response action: Send notifications to one or more recipients Send SNMP traps to third-party consoles Run a custom script Perform two or all of these actions at once Alarm actions are defined in alarm settings. Every action is associated with a specific condition that describes when the action must be performed. You can choose to perform post-alarm actions under one of the following conditions: Alarm severity changes to Error Alarm severity changes to Error or Warning Alarm severity changes to any level (Error, Warning or Info) By default, all predefined alarms are configured to send notifications to the default notification group whenever alarm severity changes from one level to another. You can change alarm settings to assign the necessary actions to alarms and define conditions when these actions should be performed. 58 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

59 Advanced Alarm Options To help you avoid alarm storms and ensure that critical issues are not overlooked, Veeam ONE Monitor provides advanced alarm configuration options alarm suppressing and alarm modelling. Alarm suppressing is used to disregard events when specific activities are performed in the virtual infrastructure, and, therefore, eliminate alarms sending. During resource-consuming operations, such as backup, Veeam ONE Monitor may inform the user about potential problems or increased resource pressure, sending a great number of alarms. The alarms suppressing feature allows you to 'switch off' alarms during such activities, or at a specific period of time when resource-consuming operations are performed. Alarms modelling may be used to verify the created alarm scheme and estimate the need of adjusting alarm settings. During alarm modelling, the configured alarms data is applied to the alarms history, therefore, producing a forecast on how many alarms will be sent over a specific period of time. If the obtained number is too high, the alarms threshold may need to be changed to avoid receiving useless alarms. If the number is too low, the alarms sensitivity may need to be increased not to miss important alerts. Alarm Reports In addition to receiving alarms in real-time, Veeam ONE allows you to analyze alarm statistics. You can use Veeam ONE Reporter dashboards and reports to track how the number of alarms was changing over time, identify short- and long-term alarm trends, detect the most affected infrastructure objects, troubleshoot the most prevailing issues and ensure that your infrastructure stays fully reliable and productive. Veeam ONE Reporter offers the following dashboards and reports concerning alarms: Alarms Dashboard allows you to analyze alarms triggered over the previous week. The dashboard provides information on the general health state of virtual infrastructure objects, shows daily roll-up of errors and warnings, enumerates typical problems and helps detect the most affected VMs, clusters, hosts and datastores. Alarms Overview Report provides an overview of the current health state of your virtual environment, details the most common alarms and identifies the most affected infrastructure objects. The report consolidates information about raised alarms and provides a granular summary for the selected time interval. For details on Veeam ONE reports and dashboards, see the Dashboards and Reports Guide. 59 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

60 Managing Alarms Veeam ONE Monitor comes with a set of predefined alarms so that you can start monitoring your environment immediately after installing the solution. Depending on your requirements, you can customize predefined alarms or create new alarms for specific monitoring conditions. To access the list of alarms, click Alarm Management at the bottom of the inventory pane. The Alarm Management view is divided into three panes inventory pane, information pane and actions pane. The inventory pane on the left shows the alarm management tree with alarm types (virtual infrastructure components to which alarms can be applied, vcloud Director components, Veeam Backup & Replication components and internal Veeam ONE alarms). The information pane contains the list of predefined and custom alarms for the type that is selected in the alarm management tree. Every alarm is described with the following details: type, name, source, state (Enabled or Disabled) and assignment scope. The bottom section of the information pane displays alarm knowledge base information on the selected alarm, such as summary, cause, resolution and external resources. The Actions pane on the right displays a list of links for performing alarm actions. 60 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

61 Creating Alarms If predefined alarms do not cover important events, conditions or state changes about which you need to be notified, you can create custom alarms. To create a new alarm, take the following steps. Step 1. Select the Alarm Type All alarms apply a certain level of the virtual, vcloud Director or backup infrastructure. The Type attribute of an alarm specifies for what kind of infrastructure objects an alarm applies. The list of available alarm types is displayed in the inventory pane on the left. To create a new alarm, select its type first: 1. Click Alarm Management at the bottom of the inventory pane. 2. In the alarm management tree, select the necessary object type. 3. Click the New link in the Actions pane on the right. The Alarm settings window will be opened. Step 2. Specify General Alarm Details On the General tab of the Alarm settings window, specify general alarm details: 1. In the Alarm name field, enter the name of the new alarm. 2. Select the Enable this alarm check box if you want to enable the alarm immediately after you save its settings. If the check box is not selected, the alarm settings will be saved, but the alarm will be disabled and will not raise any notifications. Note that at this point, the alarm type cannot be changed. 61 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

62 Step 3. Specify Alarm Rule(s) and Severity On the Rules tab of the Alarm settings window, specify rules for triggering the alarm: 1. Click the Add button. 2. At the Choose Rule Type step of the wizard, choose the necessary type of the rule. Available rule types vary depending on the selected alarm type. For the list of alarm rule types, see Appendix A. Alarm Rules and Events. 3. At the Define Rule step of the wizard, specify conditions (or other information, as applicable) for the alarm rule and the alarm severity. 4. Select the Enable this rule check box you want to put the rule in action for the alarm. If the check box is not selected, the rule settings will be saved, but the rule will be disregarded. 5. If you are adding event-based rules, you can additionally specify alarm suppression settings and trigger settings. In the Ignore after field, enter the number of times the alarm will be triggered before all further repetitive alarms are suppressed. By default, this value is set to 1. For example, an alarm is configured to trigger when a host loses its network connection, and the Ignore after value is set to 1. If a host loses its network connection, an event informing about connection loss will be raised by the hypervisor, and Veeam ONE will trigger an alarm. All further events informing about problems with host network connectivity will be ignored until you resolve the alarm that has already been triggered. In the Trigger after field, enter the number of times an event must repeat before Veeam ONE triggers an alarm. By default, this value is set to 0, which means that Veeam ONE triggers an alarm after the first event occurrence. 62 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

63 6. Repeat steps 1-5 for every new rule you want to add. 7. You can create up to 8 rules for one alarm. Note that all alarm rules must be of the same type. You can add either event-based rules or rules for specific conditions or state. You cannot combine event-based rules and condition rules for the same alarm. 8. After you have added rules, make sure the Enabled check box is selected for all rules that should be used by the new alarm. The alarm will be triggered if any of its enabled rules is true. If you add several rules with the same severity level, Veeam ONE will trigger the alarm whenever conditions of any rule are met. Step 4. Specify Alarm Assignment On the Assignment tab of the Alarm settings window, specify infrastructure object(s) to which the alarm will be assigned. Virtual Infrastructure Alarms For alarms that apply to virtual infrastructure objects, the following assignment options are available: Entire Virtual Infrastructure is the default assignment scope for all new alarms. Select this option if you want to assign the alarm to all virtual infrastructure objects that match the alarm type. For example, if you are working with an alarm of the Host type, the alarm will be assigned to all hosts in the monitored virtual environment. Container(s) are parent instances that include virtual infrastructure objects to which the alarm should be assigned. For example, you can assign an alarm of the Virtual Machine type to a specific host. As the result, the alarm will apply to all VMs that run on the selected host. To assign the alarm to one or several containers, select the Container(s) option, click Browse and choose the necessary containers from the virtual infrastructure hierarchy. If required, you can also select single objects that match the alarm type (for example, you can assign a Host alarm to a specific host rather than to a host container). Business view group(s) are custom categorization groups that you have previously configured in Veeam ONE Business View. For example, if VMs in your environment are divided 63 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

64 by departments, you can create a set of alarms that correspond to requirements of a specific department and assign these alarms to the necessary department group. To assign the alarm to one or several groups, select the Business view group(s) option, click the Browse button and choose the necessary groups and objects within these groups from the business view hierarchy. 64 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

65 vcloud Director Alarms For alarms that apply to vcloud Director objects, the following assignment options are available: Entire vcloud Director Infrastructure is the default assignment scope for all new alarms. Select this option if you want to assign the alarm to all vcloud Director objects that match the alarm type. For example, if you are working with an alarm of the vcloud Director Organization type, the alarm will be assigned to all organizations in the monitored cloud environment. Container(s) are parent instances that include vcloud Director objects to which the alarm should be assigned. For example, you can assign an alarm of the vcloud Director vapp type to a specific organization. As the result, the alarm will apply to all vapps belonging to this organization. To assign the alarm to one or several containers, select the Container(s) option, click Browse and choose the necessary containers from the vcloud Director hierarchy. If required, you can also select single objects that match the alarm type (for example, you can assign a vcloud Director vapp alarm to a specific vapp rather than to a vapp container). 65 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

66 Veeam Backup & Replication Alarms For alarms that apply to Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure components, the following assignment options are available: Entire Backup Infrastructure is the default assignment scope for new alarms. Select this option if you want to assign the alarm to all backup infrastructure components that match the alarm type. For example, if you are working with an alarm of the Repository type, the alarm will be assigned to all repositories in the backup infrastructure. Container(s) are parent instances that include backup infrastructure components to which the alarm should be assigned. For example, you can assign an alarm of the Repository type to a specific backup server. As the result, the alarm will apply to all repositories that are managed by the selected backup server. To assign the alarm to one or several containers, select the Container(s) option, click Browse and choose the necessary containers from the backup infrastructure hierarchy. If required, you can also select single components that match the alarm type (for example, you can assign a Repository alarm to a specific repository rather than to a repository container). Notes When assigning alarms, note the following restrictions: Alarm can be assigned to infrastructure objects that correspond to the alarm type. For example, alarm of the VM type can be assigned to virtual machines or to a container that includes virtual machines. The same applies to Business View groups: the alarm type must match the Business View category type. You cannot assign an alarm of the Host type to a Business View group that is used to categorize VMs. 66 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

67 Step 5. Specify Alarm Actions On the Actions tab of the Alarm settings window, specify what actions must be performed after the alarm is triggered or after alarm status changes. You can choose to notify virtual infrastructure administrators or run a custom script. Note: To be able to receive and trap notifications, you should configure general mail and trap notification settings either using the Configuration Wizard or adjusting Veeam ONE Monitor server settings. To learn how to configure notification settings for alarms, see Configuring Alarm Notification Settings. 1. From the Action list, select the necessary action: Send to a default group is the default action that applies to all new and predefined alarms. Select this option if you want to send an notification to all recipients included in the default notification group when the alarm is triggered or when the alarm status changes. The default notification group can be configured in Veeam ONE Monitor server settings. Send notification select this option if you want to send an notification to specific recipients when the alarm is triggered or when the alarm status changes. In the Value field, enter recipients addresses. If you want to specify several recipients, separate addresses with semicolons. Send SNMP trap select this option if you want to send a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) trap when the alarm is triggered or when the alarm status changes. You can use SNMP traps to feed alarm notification data into SNMPenabled system monitors, such as CA Unicenter, BMC Patrol, IBM Tivoli or HP OpenView. Veeam ONE Monitor allows you to send trap notifications to 4 different destinations at once. Veeam ONE Monitor provides the following information in the body of an SNMP notification: name of the affected node, old alarm status, new alarm status, alarm name and triggering summary. Run script select this option if you want to run a custom script when the alarm is triggered or when the alarm status changes. By running a post-alarm script, you can automate routine tasks that are normally performed when specific alarms fire. For example, if a critical system is affected, you may need to immediately open a ticket with the in-house support or perform some corrective actions that will eliminate the problem. In the Value field, enter the path to the executable file (please note that the executable file must be located on the Veeam ONE server). You can use the following parameters in the command line for running the script: %1 alarm name; %2 fired node name; %3 triggering summary; %4 time; %5 alarm status; %6 old alarm status. 2. In the Condition field, describe when the action must be performed: Errors and warnings select this option if the action must be performed every time when the alarm status changes to Error or Warning. Errors only select this option if the action must be performed every time when the alarm status changes to Error. Any state select this option if the action must be performed every time when the alarm status changes to Error, Warning or Info. 67 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

68 If necessary, you can specify multiple actions for the same alarm. To add a new action, click the Add button at the bottom and repeat steps 1-2 for every new action. Step 6. Configure Alarm Suppression Settings In some cases, it may be necessary to suppress alarms that occur under specific conditions or during a specific time interval. For example, alarms informing about high resource utilization may be suppressed if these alarms occur during a scheduled resource consuming operation (such as backup performed with Veeam Backup & Replication or other operations). On the Suppress tab of the Alarm settings window, specify alarm suppression settings: If the alarm must be triggered under any conditions, select the Do not suppress alarm check box. To suppress the alarm when a specific resource-consuming operation is performed, select the Suppress when certain task is performed option and choose the necessary types of tasks Veeam Backup & Replication operations, snapshot creation, snapshot deletion. To suppress the alarm during a certain period of the day, select the Suppress alarm during the following time period option and specify the time interval during which the alarm must be suppressed. For example, you can use this option if you have scheduled backup operations every night. To suppress the alarm according to a specific schedule during the week, select the Suppress alarm based on the custom schedule option. Specify time intervals on specific weekdays during which the alarm must be suppressed. You can add more than one record for one weekday. Note, however, that the time intervals specified for the same day must not intersect. 68 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

69 Step 7. Enter Alarm Details On the Knowledge base tab of the Alarm settings window: 1. Enter the alarm details, such as summary, cause and resolution. 2. In the External field, provide links to external resources containing reference information, such as vsphere Resource Management Guide. 3. In the Custom field, enter additional information, such as comments of instructions for resolving the problem. When you select an alarm in the Alarm Management view or on the Alarms monitoring dashboard, alarm details will be displayed in the lower pane. 69 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

70 Step 8. Save Alarm Settings Review the specified alarm settings, click OK to save the alarm. 70 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

71 Modifying Alarms You can modify settings of a predefined or a custom alarm: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. Do one of the following to open the Alarm settings window: Double click the necessary alarm in the list. Right-click the alarm and choose Edit from the shortcut menu. Select the alarm in the list and click Edit in the Actions pane on the right. 3. Change the necessary alarm settings. For details on working with alarm settings, see Creating Alarms. Veeam ONE Monitor supports batch alarm editing. In the batch editing mode, you can change only the Actions and Suppression alarm settings. To modify settings of several alarms in batch: 1. Open the Alarm Management view 2. Select the necessary alarms in the list using the [CTRL] or [SHIFT] keys on the keyboard and do one of the following: Right-click the selection and choose Edit from the shortcut menu. Click Edit in the Actions pane on the right. 3. Change the actions or suppression settings. For details on working with alarm settings, see Creating Alarms. Changing Alarm Assignment By default, all predefined alarms in Veeam ONE Monitor are assigned to the root level of your infrastructure. Alarms for monitoring the virtual environment apply to the root level of the virtual infrastructure, vcloud Director alarms apply to the root vcloud Director level and Veeam Backup & Replication alarms apply to the root level of the backup infrastructure. You can change the assignment scope for both predefined or custom alarms: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the alarm management tree, select the necessary type of infrastructure objects. 3. In the information pane, right-click the necessary alarm and choose Edit assignment from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can select an alarm and click Edit assignment in the Actions pane on the right. 4. In the Edit assignment window, select the effective assignment rules and click Remove. 5. Click the Add button and choose one of the following options: Infrastructure tree choose this option if you want to assign the alarm to a specific level of the virtual infrastructure. You can select infrastructure objects that match the alarm type or choose containers from the virtual infrastructure hierarchy. For example, you can assign an alarm of the Virtual Machine type to a specific VM, resource pool, ESX(i) host, cluster, datacenter or vcenter Server. Business View choose this option if you want to assign the alarm to custom categorization groups that you have configured in Veeam ONE Business View. 71 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

72 For example, if VMs in your environment are divided into SLA groups, you can create a set of alarms that correspond to specific service level requirements and assign these alarms to the necessary SLA group. vcloud Director View choose this option if you want to assign the alarm to a certain level of your vcloud Director infrastructure. You can select infrastructure objects that match the alarm type or choose containers from the vcloud Director hierarchy. For example, you can assign an alarm of the vcloud Director vapp type to a specific vapp, organization VDC, organization or vcloud Director cell. Data Protection View choose this option if you want to assign the alarm to a certain level of your Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure. You can select backup infrastructure objects that match the alarm type or choose containers from the backup infrastructure hierarchy. For example, you can assign an alarm of the Repository type to a specific repository, Veeam backup servers or Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager. 6. Repeat step 6 for all virtual infrastructure objects or categorization groups to which the alarm must be assigned. Note: You cannot combine multiple assignment types (Infrastructure tree, Business View and vcloud Director View and Data Protection View) for the same alarm. For example, you cannot assign an alarm to a Business View categorization group and to a specific level of your virtual infrastructure at the same time. Notes When assigning alarms, note the following restrictions: Alarm can be assigned to infrastructure objects that correspond to the alarm type. For example, alarm of the VM type can be assigned to virtual machines or to a container that includes virtual machines. The same applies to Business View groups: the alarm type must match the Business View category type. You cannot assign an alarm of the Host type to a Business View group that is used to categorize VMs. 72 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

73 Excluding Objects from Alarm Assignment You can exclude specific infrastructure objects from the alarm assignment scope. This option can be useful if you want to assign the alarm to an infrastructure container, and exclude specific child objects in the container from the assignment scope. For example, you can assign an alarm of the Virtual Machine type to a host. However, if the alarm rules do not apply to specific VMs running on the host, you can exclude these VMs from the assignment scope. To exclude infrastructure objects from the alarm assignment scope: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the information pane, right-click the necessary alarm and select Edit exclusions from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can select an alarm and click Edit exclusions in the Actions pane on the right. 3. In the Edit exclusions window, click the Add button and choose objects that you want to exclude from the assignment scope: Infrastructure tree choose this option if you want to select objects from the virtual infrastructure hierarchy. You can select objects that match the alarm type or choose parent objects (containers) from the virtual infrastructure hierarchy. For example, if you work with the alarm of the Virtual Machine type, you can exclude a specific VM, host, cluster and so on. Business View choose this option if you want to exclude custom categorization groups that you have previously configured in Veeam ONE Business View, or objects from these groups. For example, if you do not want to monitor resource usage metrics for VMs that belong to the QA and RnD departments, you can group VMs by department in Veeam ONE Business View and then exclude QA and RnD VMs from the alarm assignment scope in Veeam ONE Monitor. vcloud Director View choose this option if you want to select objects from the vcloud Director hierarchy. You can select objects that match the alarm type or choose containers from the vcloud Director infrastructure hierarchy. For example, if you work with an alarm of the vcloud Director vapp type, you can exclude a specific vapp, organization VDC, organization or vcloud Director cell. Data Protection View choose this option if you want to select objects from the Veeam Backup & Replication hierarchy. You can select backup infrastructure objects that match the alarm type or choose containers from the backup infrastructure hierarchy. For example, if you work with an alarm of the Repository type, you can exclude specific repositories, Veeam backup servers or Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager. You can exclude virtual infrastructure, vcloud Director and Business View objects from the scope of the same alarm. 4. Repeat step 3 for all virtual infrastructure objects or categorization groups you want to exclude. 5. In the Edit exclusions window, click OK. Note: When you choose to exclude a container, all child objects within this container will be excluded from the alarm scope. For example, if you exclude a host from the alarm, all VMs running on the host will be excluded from the alarm assignment scope. 73 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

74 Note: When you exclude an object from an alarm, all unresolved Warning or Error notifications that were triggered by this alarm for the object will change their status to Resolved. Viewing Alarm Exclusions You can quickly access the list of excluded objects for any alarm: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the information pane, select the necessary alarm and click Show all exclusions in the Actions pane on the right. 74 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

75 Copying Alarms Instead of creating a new alarm from scratch, you can create a copy of an existing alarm and modify its settings. An alarm copy keeps the same settings as the original alarm, except alarm assignment initially, an alarm copy is not assigned to any virtual infrastructure, vcloud Director objects, Business View groups or Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure components. To create an alarm copy: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the information pane, select the necessary alarm. Use the [CTRL] and [SHIFT] keys on the keyboard to select multiple alarms. 3. Right-click the selection and choose Copy from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can click Copy in the Actions pane on the right. What You Can Do Next After you create an alarm copy, you can change its settings and assignment scope: 1. Find the alarm copy in the list of alarm. Veeam ONE Monitor uses the following pattern for names of alarm copies: 'Copy of <alarm name>'. 2. Change alarm settings and alarm assignment scope. For details on working with alarm settings, see Creating Alarms. Disabling and Enabling Alarms You can disable alarms that you do not use for monitoring: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the information pane, select the necessary alarm. Use the [CTRL] and [SHIFT] keys on the keyboard to select multiple alarms. 3. Right-click the selection and choose Disable from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can click Disable in the Actions pane on the right. Note: After you disable an alarm, all unresolved Warning or Error notifications that were triggered by this alarm will change their status to Resolved. To enable alarms that were previously disabled: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the information pane, select the necessary alarm. Use the [CTRL] and [SHIFT] keys on the keyboard to select multiple alarms. 3. Right-click the selection and choose Enable from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can click Enable in the Actions pane on the right. 75 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

76 Deleting Alarms You can delete alarms you no longer need for monitoring: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the information pane, select the necessary alarm. Use the [CTRL] and [SHIFT] keys on the keyboard to select multiple alarms. 3. Right-click the selection and choose Delete from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can click Delete in the Actions pane on the right. 4. Click Yes in the dialog box to confirm deletion. Note: Even if you delete an alarm in the Alarm Management view, Veeam ONE Monitor will retain its history all fired alarms and alarm status changes will be available on the Alarms monitoring dashboard. The status of a deleted alarm is changed to Resolved. To view the alarm history, you need to apply the Show resolved alarms filter. For details on working with triggered alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. Exporting and Importing Alarms You can export alarms to an XML file and import alarms from an.xml file. Exporting and importing alarms can be useful if you need to back up you alarm settings, or if you want to copy alarm settings from one Veeam ONE deployment to another. To export alarms to an.xml file: 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the alarm management tree, select the type of infrastructure object for which you want to export alarms. 3. Right-click the object and choose Alarms > Export Alarms from the shortcut menu. 4. Save the.xml file with alarm settings. To import alarms from an.xml file: Notes 1. Open the Alarm Management view. 2. In the alarm management tree, right-click any object and choose Alarms > Import Alarms from the shortcut menu. 3. Specify path to an.xml file with alarm settings. When importing alarms from an.xml file, Veeam ONE Monitor can create new alarms or update alarms that you already have. If an alarm in the.xml file matches any existing Veeam ONE Monitor alarm by name, Veeam ONE Monitor will suggest you to update settings of an existing alarm with data from the.xml file. You can either replace an existing alarm with the alarm from the.xml file, or leave the existing alarm without any changes. If an alarm in the.xml file does not match any existing alarm by name, Veeam ONE Monitor will create a new alarm. 76 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

77 Configuring Alarm Notification Settings To receive and trap notifications when alarms are triggered or when alarms change their status, you can configure and trap notification settings. Notifications To ensure that you do not miss critical changes or events that occur in your environment, you can configure Veeam ONE Monitor to send notifications when a specific alarm is triggered or when alarm status is changed. To configure notification settings for alarms: 1. Specify SMTP server settings. To learn how to specify SMTP server settings, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 1. Configure SMTP Server Settings. 2. Choose format for the notification template and customize it if necessary. You can configure the following template settings: Choose to send notifications as HTML or plain text messages Customize the subject of notifications Choose whether you want to include knowledge base articles in the body To customize template, adjust Veeam ONE Monitor Server settings. For details, see sections SMTP settings and Notification Policy. 3. Create a list of notification recipients. You can use the following options for configuring the list of recipients: Add recipients to the default notification group. This option can be useful if you want to notify multiple monitoring operators or administrators when a critical alarm fires or when the alarm changes its status. By default, all predefined alarms are configured to send notifications to the default notification group. However, you can configure custom alarms to send notifications to the default notification group as well. To learn how to add recipients to the default notification group, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 2. Configure Notification Settings. Explicitly specify recipients for every alarm on which you want to be notified. To create the list of recipients for an alarm, change alarm action settings. To learn how to change alarm action settings, see Creating Alarms > Step 5. Specify Alarm Actions. You can use both options if you want to send an to the default notification group and to a number of other recipients at the same time. 4. If necessary, change notification frequency for objects in your virtual environment, vcloud Director and Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure. To learn how to change notification frequency, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 3. Configure Frequency. 5. Change alarm action settings to enable notifications for the necessary alarms. To learn how to enable notifications for an alarm, see Creating Alarms > Step 5. Specify Alarm Actions. Note: Out of the box, all Veeam ONE Monitor predefined alarms are configured to send notifications to the default notification group. To quickly enable notifications for predefined alarms, you can specify SMTP server settings and add recipients to the default notification group. 77 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

78 SNMP Traps Veeam ONE Monitor supports SNMP versions 1, 2 and 3, and allows feeding alarm notification data into SNMP-enabled system monitors. To send SNMP traps when a specific alarm is triggered or when alarm status is changed: 1. Define SNMP settings in Veeam ONE Monitor. For details, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 4. Configure SNMP Settings. 2. Configure SNMP service properties on trap recipients' computers. For details, see see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 4. Configure SNMP Settings. 3. Change alarm action settings to enable SNMP traps for the necessary alarms. To learn how to enable SNMP traps for an alarm, see Creating Alarms > Step 5. Specify Alarm Actions. 78 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

79 Modelling Alarm Number Alarm modelling allows you to forecast the number and type of alarms that will be sent for a specific infrastructure object within a chosen time interval. To model the alarm number, Veeam ONE Monitor applies the current alarm settings to the historical data for the chosen infrastructure object and calculates the approximate number of alarms that will be sent within the specified time interval. Alarm modelling can help you avoid receiving non-significant alarms, or vice versa missing important events. After you change alarm settings, you can perform alarm modelling to estimate how many alarms will be triggered for an infrastructure object if you keep the effective alarm settings. Taking into consideration the modeled number of alarms, you can consider changing alarm settings for example, if the number is too high, you may need to adjust alarm rule conditions. To forecast the number of alarms that will be sent for a specific infrastructure object: 1. Open the Infrastructure View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. In the inventory pane, select an object for which you want to perform analysis and click Modelling on the toolbar. Alternatively, you can right-click the necessary object in the inventory pane and select Alarms > Modelling from the shortcut menu. Note: In the Infrastructure View, you can select any level of the virtual infrastructure. In the Business View, you can select a cluster, host, VM or storage node. In the Data Protection View, you can select an Enterprise Manager or backup server node. 3. In the Alarm Modelling window, specify the period for which existing alarm statistics must be analyzed: Week, Month or Year. 4. Click the Start Modelling button. Veeam ONE Monitor will display the number of alarms of different severity that will be sent within the selected period of time. 79 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

80 Monitoring Alarms Alarms are triggered when the state of the managed environment changes to match conditions described by alarm rules. For example, an alarm can be triggered when the health state of an infrastructure object changes, a specific event occurs, or a metric value exceeds or falls below the alarm threshold. To view alarms triggered for a specific infrastructure object (or objects): 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. In the inventory pane, select the necessary node. 3. In the information pane, open the Alarms tab. The list of alarms shows alarms triggered for the selected infrastructure object and alarms for child objects. For every alarm, the following details are available: Status current status of the alarm (Warning, Error, Resolved or Info). If an alarm was triggered multiple times, its latest state will be displayed in the list. Alarm time date and time when the alarm was triggered. If the alarm was triggered multiple times, the latest date time when the alarm was triggered will be displayed in the list. Source name of the infrastructure object that caused the alarm. To view all alarms related to the infrastructure object, click the source link. Type type of the infrastructure object that caused the alarm. Name alarm name. Click the name link to open alarm details in the Alarm Management section. The alarm name can be shown as plain text if a corresponding alarm has been already deleted. Repeat count the number of times the alarm was triggered. Click the repeat count link to view the alarm history. For more details, see Viewing Alarm History. 80 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

81 The lower section of the information pane displays knowledge base for the selected alarm description of the problem, possible causes, instructions for resolution, links to external resources and other details. Finding Alarms You can use filters at the top of the Alarms dashboard to quickly find the necessary alarms. You can filter alarms by the following criteria: To display or hide alarms with a specific severity, click the status buttons at the top of the list Show objects with errors, Show objects with warnings, Show resolved alarms and Show information messages. To display or hide alarms for a specific type of infrastructure objects, click the object type buttons at the top of the list Show alarms for all types of objects or Show [object type] alarm. To display alarms that are related to the selected infrastructure object, use the This object button. Release the button to display alarms for the selected infrastructure object and alarms for its child objects. To set the time interval within which alarms were triggered, use the Filter alarms by time period button. Release the button to discard the time period filter. To find alarms by alarm name, use the search field at the top right corner of the Alarms dashboard. You can click column names to sort alarms by a specific parameter. For example, to view repetitive alarms, you can sort alarms in the list by Repeat Count. 81 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

82 Performing Alarm Actions You can perform a number of actions on triggered alarms. To perform an action, select an alarm in the list and click a quick link in the Actions pane. Alternatively, you can right-click an alarm in the list and choose an action from the shortcut menu. Suppressing Alarms To suppress alarms, you can use several options described below. Maintenance Mode If you do not want to receive alarms for a specific infrastructure object (for example, during the maintenance period), you can place this object to the maintenance mode: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. In the inventory pane, right-click an infrastructure object and choose Alarms > Maintenance Mode from the shortcut menu. If you select a container in the inventory pane and choose to put the container to the maintenance mode, Veeam ONE Monitor will provide two choices enable maintenance mode for this object only or enable the maintenance mode for the container with all its child objects. To exit the maintenance mode, right-click the object in the inventory pane and choose Alarms > Exit Maintenance Mode. Alarm Suppression Settings For each alarm, you can configure suppression settings to 'switch off' the alarm during specific resource-consuming operations (such as backup). For details on configuring alarm suppression settings, see Creating Alarms > Step 6. Configure Alarm Suppression Settings. Other Suppression Options Alarms can also be suppressed for specific host and VM components: You can suppress alarms for host hardware components using the Host Hardware dashboard. For details, see Host Hardware State. You can suppress alarms for VM guest OS disks using the VM summary dashboard. For details, see Virtual Machine Summary. 82 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

83 Defining Alarm Exclusions If you do not want to receive alarms about specific infrastructure objects, you can exclude these objects from the alarm assignment scope. Excluding Single Objects You can exclude a single infrastructure object from the assignment scope of an alarm: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. Open the Alarms tab. 3. Select the necessary alarm in the list and do one of the following: Right-click the alarm and choose Exclude from the shortcut menu. Click Exclude in the Actions pane. If you select a container object and choose an alarm that was triggered for its child object, Veeam ONE Monitor will provide two exclusion choices exclude the child object only or exclude the whole container from the alarm assignment scope. For example, you have selected a cluster in the inventory pane. In the list of alarms, you will see alarms on the cluster and alarms on the hosts in the cluster. If you select an alarm that was triggered for a host, you can exclude either the host (child object) or the whole cluster (container). 4. Click Yes in the dialog box to confirm exclusion. Note: When you exclude an object from an alarm, all unresolved Warning or Error notifications that were triggered by this alarm for the object will change their status to Resolved. 83 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

84 Excluding Multiple Objects You can exclude multiple infrastructure objects or Business View groups from the assignment scope of an alarm: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. Open the Alarms tab. 3. Select the necessary alarm in the list and do one of the following: Right-click the alarm and choose Edit exclusions from the shortcut menu. Click Edit exclusions in the Actions pane. 4. In the Edit exclusions window, click the Add button and choose one of the following options: Infrastructure tree choose this option if you want to select objects from the virtual infrastructure hierarchy. You can select specific objects that match the alarm type or choose parent objects (containers) from the virtual infrastructure hierarchy. For example, if you work with the alarm of the Virtual Machine type, you can exclude a specific VM, host, cluster and so on. When you choose to exclude a virtual infrastructure container, all child objects within this container will be excluded from the alarm scope. For example, if you exclude a host from the Snapshot age alarm, all VMs running on the host will be excluded from the alarm scope. Business View choose this option if you want to exclude categorization groups that you have previously configured in Veeam ONE Business View or objects from these groups. For example, if you do not want to monitor resource usage for VMs that belong to the QA and RnD departments, you can group VMs by department in Veeam ONE Business View and then exclude QA and RnD VMs from alarm assignment scope in Veeam ONE Monitor. vcloud Director View choose this option if you want to exclude objects from the vcloud Director hierarchy. You can select objects that match the alarm type or choose containers from the virtual infrastructure hierarchy. For example, if you work with the alarm of the vcloud Director vapp type, you can exclude a specific vapp, organization VDC, organization or vcloud Director cell. Data Protection View choose this option if you want to exclude objects from the Veeam Backup & Replication hierarchy. You can select backup infrastructure objects that match the alarm type or choose containers from the backup infrastructure hierarchy. For example, if you work with the alarm of the Repository type, you can exclude a specific repositories, Veeam backup servers or Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager. 4. Repeat step 3 for all infrastructure objects or categorization groups you want to exclude. 5. In the Edit exclusions window, click OK. 84 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

85 Tip: You can also edit alarm exclusion settings in the Alarm Management section. Click the alarm name in the list to switch to the Alarm Management view and exclude objects from the alarm scope as described in section Excluding Objects from Alarm Assignment. Excluding Objects from Multiple Alarms You can exclude a single infrastructure object from the scope of multiple alarms: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. Open the Alarms tab. 3. Select an alarm for the necessary infrastructure object and do one of the following: Right-click the alarm and choose Defined alarms in the shortcut menu. Click Defined alarms in the Actions pane. Alternatively, you can right-click the object in the inventory pane and select Alarms > Exclude from the shortcut menu. 4. The Defined Alarms window will display the list of enabled and disabled alarms that apply to the selected object. Select check boxes next to alarms from which you want to exclude the object. 5. Click OK. 85 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

86 Viewing Alarm History Veeam ONE Monitor keeps the history of alarm status changes for every triggered alarm. The number of times the alarm changed its status is displayed as the Repeat Count value. To view detailed alarm history: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. Open the Alarms tab and do one of the following: Click the Repeat Count link in the list of alarms. Double-click an alarm in the list. Right-click an alarm and select Show history from the shortcut menu. Select an alarm in the list and click Show history in the Actions pane. The Alarm history window provides detailed data on the history of alarm status changes: assigned status, time, rule that triggered the alarm and comments for resolved alarms. 86 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

87 Resolving Alarms Alarms are resolved automatically in the following cases: When the alarm is disabled or deleted. When an object that caused the alarm is deleted or excluded from the alarm assignment scope. When conditions that caused the alarm are eliminated, and the alarm is configured to react to this. Some alarms can be configured to change the alarm severity to Resolved in specific cases. Other alarms (such as alarms that are triggered when resource usage is above a certain threshold) are resolved automatically when the resource usage level is back to normal. You can manually resolve alarms if the state of the monitored object has returned back to normal, and/or if the alarm requires no further investigation, and no corrective actions should be taken. To resolve one or more alarms: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. Open the Alarms tab. 3. Select one or more alarms in the list and do one of the following: Right-click the selection and choose Resolve in the shortcut menu. Select one or more alarms in the list and click Resolve in the Actions pane. 4. In the Resolve Alarm window, enter the reason for changing the alarm status or any other comments. The message you enter will be available in the Comment field of the alarm history details. 87 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

88 Internal Alarms In addition to alarms for monitoring your virtual and backup environment, Veeam ONE Monitor includes a set of predefined alarms to monitor internal Veeam ONE problems such as data collection issues, problems with server connections or license issues. To access and manage internal alarms: 1. Click Alarm Management at the bottom of the inventory pane. 2. In the alarm management three, select the Internal node. The list of predefined internal alarms will be available in the information pane. To view internal alarms that were triggered by Veeam ONE Monitor: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. In the Configuration issues pane, click the Show details link. The list of internal alarms will be shown, including the alarm name, alarm description and the name of the infrastructure object that caused the alarm to fire. 3. Click the object name to drill-down to the list of alarms for the selected object. For the list and description of internal alarms, see Appendix A. Alarm Rules and Events. 88 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

89 Virtual Infrastructure Monitoring Veeam ONE Monitor offers a variety of tools for monitoring the virtual environment from any perspective and with any level of detail. In Veeam ONE Monitor, you can: 1. Monitor health state of the virtual environment. Start with Summary dashboards to check the overall health state of the virtual environment and reveal hotspots. You can quickly review the state of virtual infrastructure components, see the latest alarms, detect the most problematic objects and drill down to the problem source for further investigation. Use the VMs dashboard to view the list of VMs in a virtual infrastructure container and check additional details for every VM such as VM's current state, parent host, IP address, DNS name and the amount of resources the VM is currently consuming. Use the Top Load and Lowest Load dashboards to detect the the most and less loaded components in the virtual environment. You can detect what virtual infrastructure objects are consuming the most and the least amount of CPU, memory, disk, network, and swap resources, or select additional counters to detect resource consumers in other areas. 2. View triggered alarms. Switch to the Alarms dashboard to see details on breached thresholds, events and problems that occurred in the virtual environment. Use the Actions pane on the alarms dashboard to detect root causes drill down to performance charts, open VM console or view the list of in-guest processes. 3. Work with performance charts and track events. Drill down to performance charts to diagnose performance problems. You can change predefined views, quickly switch between charts and view events occurring in your environment to get all-round statistics. 4. Investigate problems from within the guest OS. Open VM console or view the list of in-guest processes to diagnose problems related to a specific service, module or application. Prerequisites Before you start monitoring your virtual environment, make sure you have configured connections to virtual servers from which Veeam ONE Monitor will collect data. For details on configuring server connections, see Connecting VMware vsphere Servers. 89 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

90 Virtual Infrastructure Summary Dashboards Virtual infrastructure summary dashboards serve as the 'launch point' for monitoring and troubleshooting. Summary dashboards reflect the health state for the selected infrastructure object or infrastructure segment. The following types of summary dashboards are available for virtual infrastructure objects: Virtual Infrastructure Summary ESX(i) Host Summary Virtual Machine Summary Datastore Summary To access a summary dashboard for a virtual infrastructure object or virtual infrastructure segment: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary object in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Summary tab. Virtual Infrastructure Summary The virtual infrastructure summary dashboard provides the health state overview for the selected virtual environment segment. The dashboard is available for the following infrastructure levels: Virtual infrastructure (root node) Virtual infrastructure container (such as folder, resource pool, host cluster, datacenter, vcenter Server) Host State, Datastores State and Virtual Machines State charts reflect the state of virtual infrastructure objects. Every chart segment represents the number of objects in a certain state healthy objects (green), objects with warnings (yellow) and objects with errors (red). Click a chart segment to drill down to the list of alarms with the corresponding status for the selected type of virtual infrastructure objects. 90 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

91 Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms that were triggered for objects in the selected virtual environment segment. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific virtual infrastructure object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the highest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 error alarms and 1 warning alarm for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific virtual infrastructure object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 91 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

92 ESX(i) Host Summary The host summary dashboard provides the health state and performance overview for the selected ESX(i) host and its child objects. Datastores State and Virtual Machines State charts reflect the state of datastores connected to the host and the state of VMs running on the host. Every chart segment represents the number of objects in a certain state healthy objects (green), objects with warnings (yellow) and objects with errors (red). Click a chart segment to drill-down to the list of alarms with the corresponding status for host child objects. Resource Usage section displays capacity and performance summary for host CPU and memory. It also shows an overview for datastores connected to the host state of the datastore, its capacity and the amount of free space on the datastore. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms triggered for the host and its child objects. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms for the host and its child objects. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms (including the host and its child objects). The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 error alarms and 1 warning alarm for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for the host and its child objects. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 92 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

93 Virtual Machine Summary The virtual machine summary dashboard provides the health state and performance overview for the selected VM. In addition, this dashboard shows the state of objects that can affect the VM performance the parent host and the datastores where VM files are located. Selected Object section at the top of the dashboard shows the VM health state (number of warnings and errors) and the date when the latest backup or replica restore point was created for the VM with Veeam Backup & Replication. CPU Usage and Memory Usage charts display the amount of CPU and memory resources that the VM is currently consuming. Guest Disk Usage chart displays the amount of available and used guest disk space with a breakdown by disks. By default, 5 guest disks with the greatest amount of used space are displayed. Use the Disks to show list to change the number of disks to display on the chart. Click the View all disks link to view details for all guest disks. In the Guests disks window, you can suppress alarms for specific disks. To suppress alarms for a disk, select the Suppress alarm check boxes next to the disk name. Note: Details on the guest disk usage are available only for VMs that have VMware Tools installed. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for the VM. Parent Object Health Status section displays the current state of the host where the VM resides and the state of datastores that host VMs files. Information available in this section may help you estimate how the state of parent objects impacts the VM performance. Click the host or datastore link to drill-down to the list of alarms for the host or datastore. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 93 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

94 Datastore Summary The datastore summary dashboard provides the health state and performance overview for the selected datastore. In addition, it shows the state of objects that can affect the datastore performance hosts that work with the datastore and VMs whose files reside on the datastore. Hosts State and Virtual Machines State charts reflect the health state of hosts that work with the datastore and VMs whose files reside on the datastore. Every chart segment represents the number of objects in a certain state healthy objects (green), objects with warnings (yellow) and objects with errors (red). Click a chart segment to drill-down to the list of alarms with the corresponding status for hosts or VMs. Disk Space Usage chart shows the amount of available, used and provisioned disk space on the datastore. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for the datastore and for objects that work with this datastore. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms for the selected object. Latest Disk Latency section displays the current read and write latency values as well as the average latency values for the past hour. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 94 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

95 Virtual Infrastructure Alarms Veeam ONE Monitor includes a set of alarms for monitoring VMware vsphere virtual environments. Predefined alarms are configured to warn you about events or changes that can adversely affect performance of operations and services in the virtual environment. To view the list of virtual infrastructure alarms: 1. Open the Virtual Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary virtual infrastructure node or virtual infrastructure segment in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Alarms tab. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. For the list and detailed description of virtual infrastructure alarms, see Appendix A. Alarm Rules and Events. 95 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

96 Virtual Infrastructure Performance Charts Performance charts show how key performance metrics have been changing over time to help you diagnose performance issues and perform root cause analysis. Performance charts display data for a particular time period (the horizontal axis) using two scales of measurement units (vertical axes). The measurement units may vary depending on selected performance counters. However, the number of units is always limited to two. Note that you will not be able to select counters using three or more measurement units. Every graph on the performance chart visualizes a specific parameter of a virtual infrastructure object (or an object instance) or, if you select to a virtual infrastructure container, summary information for the container. The chart legend shows information about objects (or object instances) and counters that are currently displayed. The information provided is: key color, object name (or object instance name), list of measurement counters and respective units of measurement, as well as the latest, minimum, average, and maximum performance data of the object. Performance charts come with a number of predefined chart views. Every predefined view logically groups related counters to display the most valuable statistics and help you speed up troubleshooting and root cause analysis of performance problems. To access a performance chart for a virtual infrastructure object or virtual infrastructure segment: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary object in the inventory pane. 3. Open the necessary performance chart tab. Performance charts can be easily customized. To learn about customization options, see Customizing Performance Charts. 96 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

97 Customizing Performance Charts You can customize performance charts to select specific objects, time intervals or performance counters to display on the charts. Selecting Objects to Chart By default, all performance charts display data for the virtual infrastructure object selected in the inventory pane. You can also choose to display performance data on charts for: Child components or objects of the selected virtual infrastructure object (for example, all hosts in the cluster) Child VMs for the selected virtual infrastructure object or segment To display performance data for direct children of the selected virtual infrastructure object: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. In the inventory pane, select the necessary virtual infrastructure object. 3. Open the necessary performance chart. 4. In the Chart options list, select Custom view. 5. In the Customize Chart Options window, choose Show performance data for these child objects. 6. Select check boxes next to child objects that should be included in the chart scope. 7. To include in the chart scope objects that are no longer available in the virtual infrastructure hierarchy (deleted child objects), select the Show performance data for deleted objects check box. To display performance data for a set of VMs in the selected virtual infrastructure segment: 1. In the inventory pane, select the necessary virtual infrastructure object. 2. Open the necessary performance chart. 3. In the Chart options list, select Custom view. 4. In the Customize Chart Options window, choose Show performance data for these VMs. You can select both direct and indirect children (children of children) of the selected virtual infrastructure object. 97 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

98 5. Select check boxes next to VMs that should be included in the chart scope. 6. To include in the chart details on objects that are no longer available in the virtual infrastructure hierarchy (deleted VMs), select the Show performance data for deleted objects check box. Note: The legend pane displays objects for which data is available for the selected time interval. 98 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

99 Selecting Chart Views and Performance Counters Performance charts come with a set of predefined chart views that logically group related performance counters. You can switch between chart views using the Chart view list at the top of the chart legend. Instead of using predefined views, you can choose a custom set of performance counters to show on the chart: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. In the inventory pane, select the necessary virtual infrastructure object. 3. Open the necessary performance chart. 4. In the Chart views list, select the Custom view option to open the Select Devices and Counters window. 5. In the Devices list, select the necessary resource device(s). Select Total to display all available devices on the chart. Note: The list of devices is not available for some performance charts. For example, for the CPU or Memory performance chart, you can only choose counters to display. 6. In Counters list, select counter(s) to display on the chart. When you select a counter, its description appears at the bottom of the window. 7. Click OK. 99 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

100 Selecting Time Interval You can choose the time interval for which performance data on the chart will be displayed. Available options are: Real-time information (past hour) Past day Past week Past month Past year Custom time range (you can choose any time interval within the specified number of hours, days, or weeks, or specify any from/to period) To specify a time interval for which performance data should be displayed: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. In the inventory pane, select the necessary virtual infrastructure object. 3. Open the necessary performance chart. 4. In the Period list, select Past hour, Past day, Past week, Past month or Past year. To define a custom time range, select Custom. In the Select Custom Time Interval window, define the necessary interval and click OK. Once you change the time interval, the time scale (X-axis) of the performance chart and the chart will change respectively. 100 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

101 Overall Chart The Overall chart shows aggregated performance data for the selected virtual infrastructure object or segment: CPU, memory consumed, memory swap used, network and datastore usage. Performance data in the chart is shown for the previous 15 minutes. In the Top line field, you can set a threshold value. The top line is displayed as the red dotted line on the chart to help you monitor whether resource usage exceeds the healthy value range. If you do not need to display the top line, enter '0' (zero) in the Top line field or disable top lines in Veeam ONE Monitor chart settings. With the top line disabled, the Y-axis will scale automatically, to match the range of the displayed data. To drill down to performance chart details, click the counter link above a performance widget. A corresponding performance chart for the selected virtual infrastructure object will be opened. 101 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

102 CPU Performance Chart The CPU chart displays historical statistics on CPU utilization for the selected virtual infrastructure object. ESX(i) Host The following table provides information on predefined views and counters that apply to hosts. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description CPU Usage CPU Usage CPU Usage MHz Percent MHz Actively used CPU of the host, as a percentage of total available CPU. Sum of actively used CPU of all powered on VMs on the host. CPU Bottlenecks Average CPU Ready Percent Average CPU Ready value for all VMs on the host. 102 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

103 Virtual Machine The following table provides information on predefined views and counters that apply to virtual machines. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description CPU Usage CPU Usage Percent Amount of actively used virtual CPU resources, as a percentage of total available CPU (this is the host s view, not the guest OS view). CPU usage MHz MHz Amount of actively used virtual CPU resources (this is the host s view, not the guest OS view). Average CPU Wait All Cores Percent CPU time the VM spent waiting for hardware or VMkernel lock thread locks. CPU Bottlenecks Average CPU Ready All Cores Percent Percentage of time the VM was ready but could not get scheduled to run on the physical CPU. CPU Co-Stop All Cores Percent Time the VM is ready to run but is unable due to co-scheduling constraints. For objects that are parent to ESX(i) hosts and VMs, Veeam ONE Monitor displays rollup values. Charts for folders, clusters, datacenters, vcenter Servers display rollup values for all hosts in the container. Charts for resource pools display rollup values for all VMs in the resource pool. 103 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

104 Memory Performance Chart The Memory chart displays historical statistics on the memory utilization for the selected virtual infrastructure object. ESX(i) Host The following table provides information on predefined views and counters that apply to hosts. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Memory Active KB Sum of all active memory metrics for all powered-on VMs plus vsphere services (such as COS, vpxa) on the host, as estimated by VMkernel based on recently touched memory pages. Memory Usage Memory Consumed KB Amount of physical memory used on the host, including memory used by the Service Console, VMkernel, vsphere services and total memory consumed by running VMs. Memory Pressure Percent Potential memory demand that is based on total allocated memory for running VMs, memory overhead, effects of memory Transparent Page Sharing and total available memory. Memory Usage Percent Memory usage as percentage of available machine memory. 104 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

105 Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Swap In Rate KBps Rate at which memory is swapped from disk into host active memory during the current interval. Memory Swap Rate Swap Out Rate KBps Rate at which memory is swapped from host active memory to disk during the current interval. Memory Swap Used KB Amount of physical memory currently swapped to disk: sum of memory swapped for all powered on VMs and vsphere services on the host. Memory Balloon KB Amount of memory allocated by the virtual machine memory control driver (vmmemctl). Memory Management Memory Compressed Memory Overhead KB KB Amount of RAM pages memory compressed by host instead of swapping to disk. Total amount of memory overhead metrics for all powered-on VMs, plus memory overhead of running vsphere services on the host. Memory Shared KB Sum of memory shared metrics for all powered-on VMs, plus memory consumed by vsphere services on the host. Memory Sharing Memory Shared Common KB Total amount of memory shared by all powered-on VMs and vsphere services on the host. Subtract this metric from the memory shared metric to calculate how much memory is saved due to sharing. Memory Latency Memory Latency Percent Percentage of time a virtual machine is waiting to access swapped or compressed memory. Virtual Machine The following table provides information on predefined views and counters that apply to virtual machines. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Memory Entitlement KB Amount of host physical memory the VM is entitled to, as determined by the ESX(i) scheduler. Memory Active KB Amount of guest physical memory actively used, as estimated by VMkernel based on recently touched memory pages. Memory Usage Memory Consumed KB Amount of guest physical memory consumed by the VM. The value includes the shared and memory that might be reserved but not actually used; overhead memory is not taken into account. Memory Usage Percent Memory usage as percentage of configured physical memory for the VM. 105 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

106 Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Swap In Rate KBps Rate at which memory is swapped from disk into active memory during the current interval. Memory Swap Rate Swap Out Rate KBps Rate at which memory is swapped from active memory to disk during the current interval. Memory Swapped KB Current amount of guest physical memory swapped out to the VM s swap file by the VMkernel. The metrics refers to VMkernel swapping, not to guest OS swapping. Memory Compressed KB Amount of RAM pages compressed by host instead of swapping to disk. Memory Management Memory Overhead Memory Balloon KB KB Amount of machine memory used by VMkernel to run the VM. Amount of memory allocated by the virtual machine memory control driver (vmmemctl). Memory Saved by Zipping KB Amount of memory saved by memory zipping. Memory Sharing Memory Shared KB Amount of guest physical memory that the VM shares with other virtual machines (through VMkernel Transparent Page Sharing and RAM deduplication). Memory Latency Memory Latency Percent Percentage of time a virtual machine is waiting to access swapped or compressed memory. For objects that are parent to ESX(i) hosts and VMs, Veeam ONE Monitor displays rollup values. Charts for folders, clusters, datacenters, vcenter Servers display rollup values for all hosts in the container. Charts for resource pools display rollup values for all VMs in the resource pool. 106 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

107 Network Performance Chart The Network chart displays historical statistics on the network usage for the selected virtual infrastructure object. ESX(i) Host The following table provides information on predefined views and counters that apply to hosts. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Network Receive Rate KBps Rate at which data is received across each physical NIC instance on the host. The counter represents the bandwidth of the network. Network Usage Network Transmit Rate KBps Rate at which data is transmitted across each physical NIC instance on the host. Network Usage KBps Network utilization, total amount of data received and transmitted across all physical NIC instances connected to the host. Network Transfer Rate (Packets) Received Packets per Second Transmitted Packets per Second Number Number Average number of packets received per second across each physical NIC instance on the host. Average number of packets transmitted per second across each physical NIC instance on the host. 107 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

108 Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Receive Packets Dropped Number Number of receives dropped. Transmit Packets Dropped Number Number of transmits dropped. Dropped and Error Packets Total Packets Dropped Packet Receive Errors Number Number Total number of dropped packets. Number of packets with errors received. Packet Transmit Errors Number Number of packets with errors transmitted. Total Errors Number Total number of packets with errors received and transmitted. Virtual Machine The following table provides information on predefined views and counters that apply to virtual machines. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Network Receive Rate KBps Rate at which data is received across the vnic instance on the VM. The counter represents the bandwidth of the network. Network Usage Network Transmit Rate KBps Rate at which data is transmitted across the vnic instance on the VM. Network Usage KBps Network utilization, sum of data received and transmitted across all vnic instances on the VM. Network Transfer Rate (Packets) Received Packets per Second Transmitted Packets per Second Number Number Average number of packets received per second by each vnic instance on the VM. Average number of packets transmitted per second by each vnic instance on the VM. For objects that are parent to ESX(i) hosts and VMs, Veeam ONE Monitor displays rollup values. Charts for folders, clusters, datacenters, vcenter Servers display rollup values for all hosts in the container. Charts for resource pools display rollup values for all VMs in the resource pool. 108 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

109 Datastore Performance Chart The Datastore chart displays historical statistics for all datastores (including vsan datastores) used by the selected infrastructure component and its child objects. ESX(i) Host The following table provides information on predefined views and counters that apply to hosts. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Disk/ESXi: Datastore I/O Number Aggregate number of I/O operations on the datastore. Datastore IOPS Disk/ESXi: Datastore Read I/O Number Average number of read commands per second to the datastore. Disk/ESXi: Datastore Write I/O Number Average number of write commands per second to the datastore. Disk/ESXi: Datastore Read Rate KBps Rate at which data is read from the datastore. Datastore Usage Rates Disk/ESXi: Datastore Write Rate KBps Rate at which data is written to the datastore. Disk/ESXi: Datastore Usage KBps Sum of read and write rates to the datastore. 109 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

110 Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Disk/ESXi: Datastore Read Latency Millisecond Average amount of time that a read from the datastore takes. Datastore Latency Disk/ESXi: Datastore Write Latency Disk/ESXi: Datastore Latency Observed by VMs Millisecond Number Average amount of time that a write to the datastore takes. The average datastore latency as seen by virtual machines. Disk/ESXi: Datastore Command Aborts Number Number of aborted SCSI commands. Datastore Issues Disk/ESXi: Datastore Bus Resets Number Number of SCSI bus reset commands. Disk/ESXi: Datastore Maximum Queue Depth Number Number of outstanding requests to the storage device. Virtual Machine The following table provides information on predefined views and counters that apply to virtual machines. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Datastore I/O Number Aggregate number of I/O operations on the datastore. Datastore Read I/O Number Average number of read commands per second to the datastore. Datastore IOPS Datastore Write I/O Number Average number of write commands per second to the datastore. Disk/vSAN: Recovery Write I/O Number Average number of write commands per second to the disk of the vsan datastore that contains copy of VM data. 110 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

111 Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Datastore Read Rate KBps Rate at which data is read from the datastore. Datastore Usage Rates Datastore Write Rate Datastore Usage KBps KBps Rate at which data is written to the datastore. Sum of read and write rates to the datastore. Disk/vSAN: Recovery Write Rate KBps Rate of writing data to the vsan datastore disk storing copy of VM data takes. Datastore Read Latency Millisecond Average amount of time that a read from the datastore takes. Datastore Latency Datastore Write Latency Millisecond Average amount of time that a write to the datastore takes. Disk/vSAN: Recovery Write Latency Millisecond The average time a write operation to the vsan datastore disk storing copy of VM data takes. Datastore Issues Datastore Command Aborts Datastore Bus Resets Number Number Number of aborted SCSI commands. Number of SCSI bus reset commands. For objects that are parent to ESX(i) hosts and VMs, Veeam ONE Monitor displays rollup values. Charts for folders, clusters, datacenters, vcenter Servers display rollup values for all hosts in the container. Charts for resource pools display rollup values for all VMs in the resource pool. 111 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

112 Virtual Disks Performance Chart The Virtual Disks chart displays historical statistics for partitions of all disks on the selected VM. The following table provides information on predefined views and counters. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Virtual Disk IOPS Read I/O Write I/O Number Number Average number of read commands issued per second to the virtual disk. Average number of write commands issued per second to the virtual disk. Virtual Disk Usage Rates Read Rate Write Rate KBps KBps Rate at which data is read from the virtual disk. Rate at which data is written to the virtual disk. Virtual Disk Latency Read Latency Write Latency Millisecond Millisecond Average amount of time that a read from the virtual disk takes. Average amount of time that a write to the virtual disk takes. 112 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

113 Storage Path Performance Chart The Storage path chart displays historical statistics for paths used by the storage adapter on the selected ESX(i) host. You can switch between adapters using the Adapter list below the performance chart. The name of each storage device connected to the storage adapter via the selected path is specified after the ESX(i) host address (separated by a forward slash). It has the following format: <HBA>:<SCSI target>:<scsi LUN>:<disk partition> The following table provides information on predefined views and counters. Chart View Measurement Unit Description Path I/O Path Read I/O Path Write I/O Number Number Number Average number of commands issued per second via the path. Average number of read commands issued per second via the path. Average number of write commands issued per second via the path. Path Read Rate KBps Rate at which data is read via the path. Path Write Rate KBps Rate at which data is written via the path. Path Read Latency Path Write Latency Millisecond Millisecond Average amount of time taken for a read operation via the path. Average amount of time taken for a write operation via the path. 113 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

114 Storage Adapter Performance Chart The Storage adapter chart displays historical statistics for the storage adapters on the selected ESX(i) host. The following table provides information on predefined views and counters. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Adapter I/O Number Average number of commands issued per second on the storage path during the collection interval. Adapter IOPS Adapter Read I/O Number Average number of read commands issued per second on the storage path during the collection interval. Adapter Write I/O Number Average number of write commands issued per second on the storage path during the collection interval. Adapter Usage Rate Adapter Read Rate Adapter Write Rate KBps KBps Rate at which data is read on the storage path. Rate at which data is written on the storage path. Adapter Latency Adapter Read Latency Adapter Write Latency Millisecond Millisecond Average amount of time that takes a read on the storage path. Average amount of time that takes a write on the storage path. 114 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

115 Disk Space Chart The Disk Space chart displays historical statistics on disk space resources and usage for the selected datastore. The chart is available for datastores and datastore clusters. The following table provides information on predefined views and counters. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Datastore Space Usage Disk/Datastore: Datastore Free Space Disk/Datastore: Datastore Provisioned Space B B Amount of free space on the datastore. Amount of storage allocated for datastore or VM. Files on the datastore and the VM cannot expand above this size. 115 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

116 Disk I/O Chart The Disk I/O chart displays historical statistics on datastore load. The chart is available for datastores and datastore clusters. Use the Chart options list to display graphs for the current object (for example, a specific datastore or a virtual infrastructure container), for VMs or for ESX(i) hosts that work with the selected datastore. For VMs or for ESX(i) hosts, this chart displays stacked graphs to let you see actual cumulative load on a particular datastore. If you choose to view the chart for the top Datastore parent object, you will also be able to stack graphs by all available datastores. The following table provides information on predefined views and counters. Chart View Measurement Unit Description Disk/ESXi: Datastore Read Rate KBps Rate at which data is read from the datastore. Disk/ESXi: Datastore Write Rate KBps Rate at which data is written to the datastore. Disk/ESXi: Datastore Usage KBps Sum of read and write rates to the datastore. Disk/ESXi: Datastore Read I/O Disk/ESXi: Datastore Write I/O Disk/ESXi: Datastore I/O Disk/ESXi: Datastore Read Latency Number Number Number Millisecond Number of times data was read from the disk by all VMs residing on the datastore. Number of times data was written to the disk by all VMs residing on the datastore. Average number of commands issued per second to the storage device by the adapter. Average amount of time taken to a read operation from the datastore (from the perspective of an ESX(i) host). 116 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

117 Chart View Disk/ESXi: Datastore Write Latency Measurement Unit Millisecond Description Average amount of time taken for a write operation to the datastore (from the perspective of an ESX(i) host). 117 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

118 Disk Issues Chart The Disk Issues tab displays historical statistics on the number of disk bus resets and disk command aborts that have occurred in the defined interval. This chart is available for datastores and datastore clusters. The following table provides information on predefined views and counters. Chart View Counter Measurement Unit Description Disk/ESXi: Datastore Bus Resets Number Number of aborted SCSI commands. Datastore Issues Disk/ESXi: Datastore Command Aborts Number Number of SCSI bus reset commands. 118 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

119 List of Virtual Machines You can view the list of virtual machines within a virtual infrastructure container on a host, on a datastore, in a folder and so on. To view the list of VMs: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary virtual infrastructure container in the inventory pane. 3. Open the VMs tab. For every virtual machine in the list, the following details are available: State state of the virtual machine (powered-on, powered-off, suspended) Name name of the virtual machine Status current status of the virtual machine in terms of alarms (healthy, warning or error) Host name of the host where the virtual machine resides Provisioned Space amount of storage space provisioned for the virtual machine Used Space amount of storage space actually used for storing virtual machine files (for VMs with thin provisioned disks, this value is normally less than Provisioned Space) CPU Usage amount of actively used virtual CPU as a percentage of total available CPU resources Memory Usage amount of actively used memory resources as a percentage of configured VM memory IP Address IP address assigned to the virtual machine DNS Name DNS name of the virtual machine vcpu number of virtual CPUs configured for the virtual machine Assigned Memory amount of virtual memory allocated for the virtual machine Guest OS guest operating system installed in the virtual machine 119 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

120 VMware Tools state of VMware Tools Hardware Version hardware version of the VM You can click column names to sort virtual machines by a specific parameter. For example, to view what virtual machines are consuming the greatest amount of memory, you can sort VMs in the list by Memory Usage. You can use the search at the top of the list to quickly find VMs by name. You can choose what columns should be shown or hidden in the VMs table. To hide one or more columns, right-click the table header and clear check boxes for corresponding data fields. To make hidden columns visible, right-click the table header and select check boxes for corresponding data fields. 120 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

121 Top VMs, Top Hosts and Lowest Load Dashboards The top and lowest load dashboards help you detect VMs or hosts consuming the greatest or the smallest amount of resources in the selected virtual infrastructure segment. Top VMs dashboard displays top VM consumers in terms of CPU, memory, datastore, network usage, memory swapped, snapshot size and snapshot age. Top hosts dashboard displays top host consumers in terms of CPU, memory, datastore, network usage and memory. Lowest load dashboard displays least loaded hosts in terms of CPU, memory, datastore, network and memory swap used. You can use this dashboard to choose hosts where you can deploy new VMs or to which you can move existing VMs. To detect the most or least loaded hosts or VMs: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary virtual infrastructure container in the inventory pane. 3. Open the necessary dashboard Top VMs, Top hosts or Lowest load. 4. Click the Change Options link in the top left corner of the dashboard. In the Interval field, set the time interval for which resource utilization statistics must be analyzed. In the VMs to display field, define the number of objects to display on the dashboard. Click OK. 5. Click the Select counters link in the top left right corner of the dashboard. In the Select counters window, choose metrics that must be included in the dashboard. Hold the [SHIFT] key on the keyboard to select multiple counters. Click OK. 121 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

122 Virtual Infrastructure Tasks & Events You can view information about tasks and events that occur in your virtual environment within the selected time interval. Veeam ONE loads tasks and events from vcenter Server. For each loaded task, it creates two events one informing about the task start and the other informing about task end. To view the list of events: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary virtual infrastructure object in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Tasks & Events tab. 4. To display events for a specific period, select the necessary time interval in the Events from list. By default, events for the previous hour are displayed. The list can display up to 1000 events at a time. To find the necessary events by event description, you can use the Search field at the top of the list. For every event in the list, the following details are available: Event type (User, Task, Info, Warning or Error) Short event description Time of occurrence Event target Object that caused or initiated the event To view a detailed description of an event, click it in the list. The event description will be shown in the Event Details pane at the bottom of the Events dashboard. When you choose a virtual infrastructure container in the inventory pane, you can view events for the selected object and events for its child objects. To hide events related to child objects, clear the Include events from child objects check box at the bottom of the Event Details section. 122 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

123 To export displayed events to a CSV file, click the Export button at the top of the list and specify the location where the file will be saved. See also: Viewing Events on Performance Charts Viewing Events in Performance Charts You can display resource-consuming events on performance charts:: Live Migration (vmotion) Snapshot creation and removal Veeam Backup & Replication events This option can help you detect events that caused performance degradation (for example, you can see what was the reason for a steep increase of the network resources usage). To display events on a performance chart: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary object in the inventory pane. 3. Open the necessary performance chart tab. 4. Select the Display known events check box at the bottom of the performance chart. 5. To choose what type of events to show on the performance chart, click the Advanced link next to the Display known events check box and select the necessary events. 123 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

124 Events are shown as vertical lines crossing the performance graphs. To learn more about an event, hover the mouse cursor over it to see a tooltip, or click the line in the graph. The Events description window will be opened. Note: The Display known events option is available only for time intervals not greater than 3 days. You will not be able to view events on the performance chart if a longer time interval is selected. 124 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

125 Host Hardware State You can monitor the health of ESX(i) host hardware components. Veeam ONE Monitor collects sensor details for chassis, memory, power, processors, software components, storage, system, watchdog, fan, temperature, voltage and other components. To monitor the health state of host hardware components: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary host in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Hardware tab. The color of the status indicator changes depending on the state of a corresponding component: Green color means the subsystem is functioning properly Yellow and red colors alert that the performance threshold is exceeded, performance has gone down or the subsystem has stopped operating. Threshold values for the state of hardware components are read from vcenter Server alarm definitions. You can suppress alarms for specific host components. To do so, select check boxes next to necessary sensors in the Suppress alarm column. 125 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

126 VM Console You can access the VM console right from the Veeam ONE Monitor interface. From within the VM console, you easily isolate the root cause of VM performance problems or perform management tasks for example, restart an unresponsive VM. This option requires no additional software installed on the Veeam ONE server and is available for both Window-based and Linux-based OS s. Note: To be able to access the VM console, the user must be either a member of the Veeam ONE Administrators group, or must have sufficient privileges on the vcenter Server. To be able to access console of a Linux-based VM, you need download PuTTY.exe and provide path to it in Veeam ONE Monitor client settings. To access VM console: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary VM in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Console tab. You can use buttons at the top of the Console tab to change the VM power state: Reboot restarts guest OS of a VM if VMware Tools are installed. Restarts a VM if VMware Tools are not installed or not available. Power on powers on a VM if the VM is powered off. Resumes a VM if the VM is suspended. Power off shuts down guest OS and powers off a VM if VMware Tools are installed. Powers off a VM if VMware Tools is not installed. Hard reset resets the VM without waiting for guest OS and VM processes to stop. Use this option carefully, only if it is necessary to reboot a stuck or unresponsive VM. Full screen switches between full screen mode and running the VM console in a separate window. Send Ctrl+Alt+Del sends the Ctrl+Alt+Del command to the VM. 126 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

127 To access the VM console or change the VM power state, you can also right-click the VM in the inventory pane and use shortcut menu commands: To access a VM using Windows Remote Desktop Connection, right-click the VM in the inventory pane, choose Remote Management > Connect to VM. To change VM power state, right-click the VM in the inventory pane, choose Remote Management and click the necessary command. To send the Ctrl+Alt+Del command to a VM, right-click the VM in the inventory pane and choose Send Ctrl+Alt+Del in the shortcut menu. Note that this command is only available if the VM Console tab is active. 127 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

128 In-Guest Processes You can view and control processes and services that are currently running inside a virtual machine, ESX host or vcenter Server. On Windows-based machines, you can view, end or restart processes. On Linux-based machines, you can view or end daemons. Note: This option is available only for VMs that have VMware Tools installed. To view the list of in-guest processes for Windows-based VMs, make sure that the Remote Registry Service is started on the virtual machine that you are trying to access. To view the list of in-guest processes for Unix-based VMs, make sure that the SSH Server is started on the virtual machine that you are trying to access. To view the list of processes: 1. Open the Infrastructure View. 2. Select the necessary VM in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Processes tab. 4. Provide OS authentication credentials (user name and password) to access the list of running processes. Every process is described with a set of counters that are presented as column headings. You can add or remove counters to monitor running processes: 1. Click the Select columns link in the upper right corner of the Processes dashboard. 2. In the Select columns window, select check boxes next to counters you want to display. 3. To view a detailed description of a counter, click it in the Counters list, and a description will be displayed in the lower pane of the window. 128 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

129 You can end unwanted processes running on the VM or restart running service: To end a process, select it in the list and click the Kill process button or right-click a necessary process and select Kill process from the shortcut menu. To restart a service, click the Restart service button or right-click a necessary service and select Restart service from the shortcut menu. 129 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

130 Launching vsphere Client You can launch vsphere Client or vsphere Web Client from within the Veeam ONE Monitor console: 1. Open the Virtual Infrastructure View. 2. Right-click a vcenter Server or ESX(i) host in the inventory pane and choose Open with vsphere Client or Open with vsphere Web Client from the shortcut menu. Note: The Open with vsphere Client option is available only if vsphere Client is installed on the machine where the Veeam ONE Monitor Client runs. 130 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

131 vcloud Director Monitoring Veeam ONE Monitor offers a comprehensive view for the logical and physical layers of the VMware vcloud Director infrastructure. Veeam ONE Monitor collects real-time statistics from connected vcloud Director servers and the underlying vcenter Servers and helps you track provider capacities, monitor resource usage and identify issues that may potentially result in SLA breaches. In Veeam ONE Monitor, you can: 1. Monitor health state of the vcloud Director infrastructure. Start with Summary dashboards to check the health state of the vcloud Director infrastructure and supporting VMware vsphere components, view the latest alarms, track pending blocking tasks and expired leases and review the overall state of vapps and VMs provisioned by vcloud tenants. 2. View triggered alarms. Switch to the Alarms dashboard to see details on issues and problems with your vcloud Director infrastructure. vcloud Director alarms will notify you on increasing resource usage for provider and organization VDCs, expiring vapp runtime and storage leases, blocking tasks left with no response and the health state of vcloud infrastructure components. 3. Work with performance charts. Drill down to performance charts to diagnose performance problems and identify resource bottlenecks. You can track CPU, memory, disk and network performance for underlying ESX(i) hosts, VMs and VM containers. 4. Monitor vcloud Director capacities and resource usage. Monitor available, allocated and consumed resources to make sure that VMs and vapps are not contending for CPU, memory and storage, and vcloud tenants have enough capacities to run their workloads. 5. Investigate problems from within the guest OS. View the list of in-guest processes to diagnose problems related to a specific service, module or application within the guest OS. Prerequisites Before you start monitoring your vcloud Director environment, make sure you have configured connections to vcloud Director servers from which Veeam ONE Monitor will collect data. For details on configuring server connections, see Connecting vcloud Director Servers. 131 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

132 vcloud Director Summary Dashboards vcloud Director summary dashboards serve as the 'launch point' for monitoring the vcloud Director infrastructure state. The dashboards reflect the health state of all vcloud Director infrastructure levels from vcloud Director cells to separate vapps and VMs. The following types of summary dashboards are available for vcloud Director infrastructure objects: vcloud Director Infrastructure Summary Provider vdcs Overview Provider vdc Summary Organizations Overview Organization Summary Organization vdc Summary vapp Summary Virtual Machine Summary To access a summary dashboard for a vcloud Director infrastructure object or segment: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select the necessary object in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Summary tab. 132 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

133 vcloud Director Infrastructure Summary The vcloud Director infrastructure summary dashboard provides the health state overview for all organizations and child vcloud Director objects in your environment. The dashboard is available for the following infrastructure levels: vcloud infrastructure (root node) vcloud Director cell presents an overview of the vcloud Director infrastructure Top 5 Organizations by VM errors, Top 5 Organizations by VM warnings and Top 5 Organizations by healthy VMs charts show organizations with the greatest number of errors (red), warnings (yellow) and organizations with no registered alarms (green). Click a chart segment to drill-down to the list of alarms with the corresponding status for the selected organization. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for the selected vcloud Director segment. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific vcloud Director infrastructure object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 error alarms and 1 warning alarm for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific vcloud Director infrastructure object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 133 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

134 Provider vdcs Overview Summary dashboard for the Provider VDCs node provides the health state overview for provider virtual datacenters under a vcloud Director cell. Error Objects, Warning Objects and Healthy Objects charts group provider vdcs by their health state. Every chart reflects the number of provider vdcs with a specific state provider vdcs with errors (red), provider vdcs with warnings (yellow) and healthy provider vdcs (green). Click the problematic chart to drill-down to the list of alarms for vdcs with the chosen health state. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms that were triggered for provider vdcs and underlying virtual infrastructure objects (datastores and hosts). Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 error alarms and 1 warning alarm for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 134 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

135 Provider vdc Summary The provider vdc summary dashboard reflects resource utilization analysis and the health state overview for the chosen provider virtual datacenter and vsphere resources. CPU Usage, Memory Usage and Storage Usage charts reflect the amount of currently consumed CPU, memory and storage resources for the chosen provider virtual datacenter. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for the provider vdc and underlying virtual infrastructure objects (datastores and hosts). Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. Alarms by Object section displays the current state of hosts and datastores that provide compute and storage resources for the provider vdc. Information in this section may help you to estimate the impact of underlying vsphere objects on the provider vdc and speed up root cause analysis. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 error alarms and 1 warning alarm for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 135 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

136 Organizations Overview Summary dashboard for the Organizations node provides an overview for organizations under the selected vcloud Director cell. Error Objects, Warning Objects and Healthy Objects charts group VMs in organizations by their health status. Every chart reflects the number of organization VMs with a specific state VMs with errors (red), VMs with warnings (yellow) and healthy VMs (green). Click the problematic chart to drill-down to the list of alarms for VMs with the chosen health state. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms that were triggered for organizations as well as for VMs and vapps within these organizations. Click the link in the Source column to drilldown to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 errors and 1 warning for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 136 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

137 Organization Summary The organization summary dashboard presents the health state overview for the chosen organization and its child objects. Virtual Machines by State chart reflects the summary health state of VMs in the organization. Every colored segment represents the number of VMs in a certain state healthy VMs (green), VMs with warnings (yellow) and VMs with errors (red). Click the chart segment to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for organization VMs with the chosen health state. Latest Blocking Tasks list displays the latest 15 suspended operations that require approval before the operation will resume. For each pending operation, Veeam ONE Monitor provides a description, the organization for which the operation was initiated and the time when the operation was initiated by an organization user. Blocking tasks that expired with timeout are not included in the list. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for the organization as well as for VMs and vapps within these organizations. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 errors and 1 warning for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 137 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

138 Organization vdc Summary The organization vdc summary dashboard presents resource utilization analysis and the health state overview for the chosen organization virtual datacenter. Virtual Machines by State chart reflects the summary health state of VMs in the organization virtual datacenter. Every colored segment represents the number of VMs in a certain state healthy VMs (green), VMs with warnings (yellow) and VMs with errors (red). Click the chart to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for VMs with the chosen health state. Expired vapps list displays vapps and vapps templates whose runtime lease or storage lease has expired. The list shows 15 items with the recently expired lease, and is only populated if the storage lease cleanup policy for the organization is set to Move to Expired Items. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for the organization vdc and its child objects (vapps and VMs). Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 errors and 1 warning for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 138 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

139 vapp Summary The vapp summary dashboard provides a health state overview for the chosen vapp and virtual machines in this vapp. The top charts show the state of virtual machines in the vapp from 3 perspectives: Virtual Machines by State chart groups VMs in the vapp by health state. Every colored segment represents the number of VMs in a certain state healthy VMs (green), VMs with warnings (yellow) and VMs with errors (red). Click the chart to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for VMs with the chosen health state. Virtual Machines by Tools State chart groups VMs in the vapp by VMware Tools state. Every colored segment reflects the number of VMs with a specific state VMware Tools is up-to-date and running (green), VMware Tools is not installed (yellow), VMware Tools needs to be updated to the latest version (red) and VMware Tools is installed but is not running for some reason (grey). Virtual Machines by Power State chart groups VMs in the vapp by power state. Every colored segment reflects the number of VMs with a specific power state powered on (green), suspended (yellow), powered off (red). Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms triggered for the vapp and VMs that belong to it. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 errors and 1 warning for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 139 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

140 Virtual Machine Summary The virtual machine summary dashboard provides the health state and performance overview for the selected VM. In addition, this dashboard shows the state of objects that can affect the VM performance the parent host and the datastores where VM files are located. Selected Object section at the top of the dashboard shows the VM health state (number of warnings and errors) and the date when the latest backup or replica restore point was created for the VM with Veeam Backup & Replication. CPU Usage and Memory Usage charts display the amount of CPU and memory resources that the VM is currently consuming. Guest Disk Usage chart displays the amount of available and used guest disk space with a breakdown by disks. By default, 5 guest disks with the greatest amount of used space are displayed. Use the Disks to show list to change the number of disks to display on the chart. Click the View all disks link to view details for all guest disks. In the Guests disks window, you can suppress alarms for specific disks. To suppress alarms for a disk, select the Suppress alarm check boxes next to the disk name. Note: Details on the guest disk usage are available only for VMs that have VMware Tools installed. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for the VM. Parent Object Health Status section displays the current state of the host where the VM resides and the state of datastores that host VMs files. Information available in this section may help you estimate how the state of parent objects impacts the VM performance. Click the host or datastore link to drill-down to the list of alarms for the host or datastore. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 140 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

141 vcloud Director Alarms Veeam ONE Monitor includes a set of alarms for monitoring VMware vcloud Director health status and resource usage. Predefined vcloud Director alarms are configured to warn you about events or issues that can cause disruptions in cloud service availability: Expiring runtime and storage leases for customers' vapps Pending blocking tasks left without timely response Breached thresholds for compute, storage and network resource utilization at various layers of the vcloud Director infrastructure Changes in health state of vcloud Director components To view the list of alarms for vcloud Director infrastructure: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select the necessary vcloud Director infrastructure node in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Alarms tab. In addition to vcloud-specific alarms, the dashboard displays alarms triggered for VMware vsphere infrastructure components hosts, datastores, vapps and VMs (available for vcloud Director node and provider VDC nodes). Thus you can monitor both the logical cloud layer and the state of underlying VMware vsphere infrastructure components. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. For the list and detailed description of vcloud Director alarms, see Appendix A. Alarm Rules and Events. 141 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

142 vcloud Director Performance Charts To facilitate the troubleshooting process and quickly identify resource bottlenecks, you can drill down to performance charts right from the vcloud Director View: Overall Chart CPU Performance Chart Memory Performance Chart Datastore Performance Chart Network Performance Chart Virtual Disks Performance Chart You can track performance metrics for separate VMs within an organization, for a VM container (such as vapp, organization or organization VDC) and for ESX(i) hosts that support provider VDCs. To drill down to a performance chart from the vcloud Director View, do one of the following: In the vcloud Director hierarchy, choose an infrastructure object (VM or VM container) and open the necessary performance chart tab in the information pane. Open the Alarms dashboard. In the list of alarms, select an alarm for the necessary VM or ESX(i) host. Click Performance in the Actions pane on the right and choose the required performance chart. Open the Alarms dashboard. In the list of alarms, select an alarm for the necessary VM or ESX(i) host. Right-click the alarm and choose Performance > performance chart from the shortcut menu. Note: When you open a performance chart for an ESX(i) host, Veeam ONE Monitor automatically switches to the Virtual Infrastructure View. For performance charts in the vcloud Director View, Veeam ONE supports a similar set of actions as for virtual infrastructure performance charts: you can change chart views and set time intervals, define objects to show on charts or select custom metrics. For mode details, see Virtual Infrastructure Performance Charts. 142 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

143 vcloud Director Resources Veeam ONE Monitor includes a set of dashboards for monitoring resource allocation and utilization at the vcloud Director infrastructure and service layers. These dashboards will help you compare vcloud capacities to the current level of resource usage and estimate how to size virtual datacenter capacities adequately in order to maintain consumers' workloads. Provider vdcs You can view a list of provider virtual datacenters configured within a vcloud Director cell: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select a vcloud Director cell or the Provider VDCs node in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Provider VDC tab. For every provider vdc in the list, the following details are shown: Name name of the provider virtual datacenter Processor used, % amount of provider VDC's CPU resources that is currently used by organizations Memory used, % amount of provider VDC's memory resources that is currently used by organizations Storage used, % amount of provider VDC's storage resources that is currently used by organizations Processor allocation, GHz amount of provider VDC's CPU resources that is committed to organization VDCs Memory allocation, GB amount of provider VDC's memory resources that is committed to organization VDCs Storage allocation, GB amount of provider VDC's storage resources that is committed to organization VDCs Resource pools number of resource pools that are backing compute resources of the provider VDC. 143 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

144 You can click column names to sort provider vdcs by a specific parameter. For example, to identify what provider VDCs are running out of storage resources, you can sort provider VDCs in the list by Storage used, %. You can use the search at the top of the list to quickly find provider VDCs by name. 144 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

145 Datastore Resources You can view a list of datastores attached to provider virtual datacenters: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select a provider VDC node in the inventory pane to view datastores attached to this provider VDC. Select the Provider VDCs node to view datastores attached to all provider VDCs within the vcloud Director cell. 3. Open the Datastores tab. For every datastore in the list, the following details are shown: Name name of the datastore (you can click the name to switch to the summary dashboard for the datastore) Type datastore filesystem (VMFS or NFS) Used Storage, GB amount of storage resources that is currently consumed on the datastore Provisioned Storage, GB amount of space that is provisioned to virtual machines. If VMs are created with thing provisioning, some of the provisioned space might not be used. Requested storage, GB amount of provisioned storage that is used by vcloud Directormanaged objects. If thin provisioning is enabled on vcloud Director, some of the requested space might not be used. Provider VDC number of provider VDCs to which the datastore is attached vcenter name of the vcenter Server that manages the datastore 145 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

146 Host Resources The Hosts dashboard shows a list of hosts that are backing a provider virtual datacenter. To view the list of provider VDC hosts: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select a provider VDC node in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Hosts tab. For every host in the list, the following details are shown: Name name of the host (you can click the name to switch to the summary dashboard for the host) Status health status of the host (healthy, warning or error) Enabled flag indicating whether the host is enabled or disabled (that is, whether new vapps can start up on the host) Ready flag indicating whether the host has been prepared for a provider vdc to use host resources Available flag indicating whether the host is available to vcloud Director Total VMs number of VMs currently registered on the host vcenter name of the vcenter Server that manages the host 146 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

147 Organizations You can view a list of organizations within the vcloud Director cell: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select the Organizations node in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Organizations tab. For every organization in the list, the following details are shown: Name name of the organization Status status of the organization indicating whether the organization is enabled (that is, users can log in to the organization and the current user sessions can run) VDCs number of virtual datacenters configured for the organization Catalogs number of organization's catalogs, both shared and non-shared vapps number of vapps configured for the organization (including expired vapps) Running VMs number of VMs currently running within this organization You can use the search at the top of the list to quickly find organizations by name. 147 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

148 Organization vdcs You can view a list of VDCs configured for a specific organization: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select an organization node in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Virtual Datacenters tab. For every virtual datacenter in the list, the following details are shown: Name name of the organization VDC CPU, % amount of CPU resources that the organization is currently using (as a percentage of resources allocated to the organization with this virtual datacenter) Memory, % amount of memory resources that the organization is currently using (as a percentage of resources allocated to the organization with this virtual datacenter) Storage, % amount of storage resources that the organization is currently using (as a percentage of resources allocated to the organization with this virtual datacenter) Allocation model allocation model for the virtual datacenter (Allocation Pool, Reservation Pool, Pay-As-You-Go) Note: For organization virtual datacenters with the Pay-As-You-Go allocation model, the amount of used resources is shown as 'Unlimited'. You can use the search at the top of the list to quickly find organization virtual datacenters by name. 148 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

149 vapps You can view a list of virtual applications created within a specific organization VDC: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select an organization virtual datacenter node in the inventory pane. 3. Open the vapps tab. For every vapp in the list, the following details are shown: Name name of the vapp State health state of the vapp Processor, GHz amount of CPU resources that the vapp and all VMs within it are currently consuming Memory, GB amount of memory resources that the vapp and all VMs within it are currently consuming Storage, GB amount of storage resources that the vapp and all VMs within it are currently consuming Lease Expiration Period amount of time left before the vapp will run before its runtime lease expires (for running vapps) or amount of time left before the vapp will be stored before its storage lease expires You can use the search at the top of the list to quickly find organization vapps by name. 149 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

150 Tracking Blocking Tasks You can track pending blocking task requests for a specific organization or all organizations at once: 1. Open the vcloud Director View. 2. Select an organization node in the inventory pane to view blocking tasks pending for to this organization. Select the Organizations node to view blocking tasks pending for all organizations within this vcloud Director cell. 3. Open the Blocking Tasks tab. For every blocking task in the list, the following details are shown: Name name of the organization Status current status of the blocking task User name of the user who initiated the task Started at date and time when the task was initiated Timeout default timeout set for blocking tasks Timeout Action the action that will be triggered upon the task after the timeout expires 150 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

151 Troubleshooting Virtual Machine Performance Veeam ONE Monitor includes a set of dashboards that give you enhanced control over VMs provisioned in your vcloud Director environment and facilitate the troubleshooting process: Top VMs dashboard displays the top resource consumers for CPU, memory, datastore, network usage, snapshot size and snapshot age. To view VMs that consume the greatest number of compute, network and storage resources, select the necessary VM container in the inventory pane and open the Top VMs tab. For details, see Top VMs, Top Hosts and Lowest Load Dashboards. Tasks & Events dashboard shows VMware vsphere tasks and events targeted at a specific VM. To view the list of tasks and events for a VM, select it in the inventory pane and open the Tasks & Events tab. For details, see Monitoring Virtual Infrastructure Tasks & Events. Processes dashboard provides control over processes and services that are currently running inside the guest OS of a VM. You can view, end or restart processes on Windows- based machines. You can view or end daemons on Linux-based machines. To view the list of processes, select the necessary VM in the inventory pane and open the Processes tab. For details, see Viewing In-Guest Processes. Console dashboard lists in-guest processes and helps you diagnose problems related to a specific service, module or application. To access a VM console, select the necessary virtual machine in the inventory pane and open the Console tab. For details, see Accessing VM Console. 151 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

152 Business View Monitoring Veeam ONE Monitor can present your virtual infrastructure from the technical perspective (in terms of VMware vsphere inventory), and from the business perspective (based on your company needs and priorities). Presentation of virtual infrastructure objects from the business perspective is enabled due to categorization capabilities provided by Veeam ONE Business View. Veeam ONE Business View lets you categorize virtual infrastructure objects VMs, hosts, clusters and datastores according to constructs of your business. You can group your virtual infrastructure objects by such criteria as business unit, department, purpose, SLA and others. Veeam ONE integrates this business categorization data into Veeam ONE Monitor, and enables you to monitor, troubleshoot, resolve issues and report on business groups of virtual infrastructure objects. To learn how to create custom categories and groups for your virtual infrastructure, refer to section Veeam ONE Business View. To work with the business view of your virtual infrastructure in Veeam ONE Monitor, click Business View at the bottom of the inventory pane. In this view, you can use monitoring capabilities for business groups created for your virtual environment. 152 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

153 Business View Summary Dashboards Veeam ONE Monitor includes a set of summary dashboards for business groups that comprise virtual infrastructure objects. You can review the summary details for all VMs, hosts, clusters or storages in custom groups, see the latest alarms, and, if necessary, drill-down to the specific objects in the group for troubleshooting. Business View Summary Business View summary dashboard presents a health state overview of objects in available Business View groups. Host and Clusters State, Datastores State and Virtual Machines State charts reflect the health state of virtual infrastructure objects in Business View groups. Every chart segment represents the number of objects in a certain state healthy objects (green), objects with warnings (yellow) and objects with errors (red). Click the problematic chart segment to drilldown to the list of alarms with the corresponding status for the selected type of virtual infrastructure objects. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for objects in available Business View groups. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific virtual infrastructure object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 errors and 1 warning for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific virtual infrastructure object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 153 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

154 Category Summary Business View category summary dashboard provides an overview of the health state and performance for categorized virtual infrastructure objects. Top 3 Groups with Errors, Top 3 Groups with Warnings and Top 3 Healthy Groups charts reflect the health state of all groups within the chosen category. Every chart segment represents 3 groups in a certain state groups that include only healthy virtual infrastructure objects (green), groups that include the greatest number of virtual infrastructure objects with warnings (yellow) and groups that include the greatest number of virtual infrastructure objects with errors (red). Click the problematic chart segment to drilldown to the list of alarms with the corresponding status for the selected Business View group. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for the selected category. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific virtual infrastructure object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 errors and 1 warning for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific virtual infrastructure object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 154 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

155 Group Summary Business View group summary dashboard provides an overview of the health state and performance for virtual infrastructure objects that belong to the chosen group. Error Objects, Warning Objects and Healthy Objects charts reflect the health state of virtual infrastructure objects in the group. Every chart segment represents the number of objects in a certain state healthy objects (green), objects with warnings (yellow) and objects with errors (red). Click the problematic chart to drill-down to the list of alarms for objects with the chosen health state. Latest Alarms list displays the latest 15 alarms for virtual infrastructure objects in the selected group. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific virtual infrastructure object. Alarms by Object list displays 15 objects with the greatest number of alarms. The value in the Alarms column shows the number of errors and warnings for an object. For example, 3/1 means that there are 3 errors and 1 warning for the object. Click the link in the Source column to drill-down to the list of alarms triggered for a specific virtual infrastructure object. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 155 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

156 Virtual Infrastructure Objects Summary In addition to viewing category and group summary, you can also monitor the summary state for categorized virtual infrastructure objects VMs, hosts, clusters and datastores. To view a summary dashboard for a specific virtual infrastructure object: 1. Open the Business View. 2. Select the necessary object the inventory pane. 3. Click the Summary tab in the details pane. For detailed information on virtual infrastructure summary dashboards, see Virtual Infrastructure Summary Dashboards. 156 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

157 Business View Alarms You can create and manage alarms for business groups of virtual infrastructure objects. For example, you can group your virtual infrastructure objects by Department to which these objects belong. For each group, you can configure alarms with severity levels and thresholds corresponding to requirements of a specific department. For Business View, Veeam ONE Monitor supports all alarms that apply to categorized objects VMs, hosts, clusters and datastores. To view the list of alarms for categorized objects: 1. Open the Business View. 2. Select the necessary category, group or object in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Alarms tab. For details on working with alarms, see Monitoring Alarms. 157 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

158 Business View Performance Charts You can launch performance charts for virtual infrastructure objects organized into business groups. You can view how objects in custom groups are performing, and identify if enough resources are allocated to these objects. For Business View, Veeam ONE Monitor supports all dashboards that apply to categorized virtual infrastructure objects VMs, hosts, clusters and datastores. To access a performance chart for a categorized virtual infrastructure object: 1. Open the Business View. 2. Select the necessary object in the inventory pane. 3. Open the necessary performance chart tab. For more details, see Virtual Infrastructure Performance Charts. 158 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

159 Troubleshooting Performance of Categorized Objects Veeam ONE Monitor features a set of dashboards that give you enhanced control over categorized virtual infrastructure objects and facilitate the troubleshooting process: Top N dashboards display top and bottom resource consumers in a group: To view VMs that consume the greatest amount of compute, network and storage resources, choose the necessary VM group in the inventory pane and open the Top VMs tab. To view the most loaded hosts, choose the necessary host group in the inventory pane and open the Top Hosts tab. To view the least loaded hosts, choose the necessary host group in the inventory pane and open the Lowest Load tab. For details, see Top VMs, Top Hosts and Lowest Load Dashboards. Tasks & Events dashboard shows tasks and events targeted for categorized objects. To view the list of tasks and events for a categorized virtual infrastructure object, select it in the inventory pane and open the Tasks & Events tab. For more details, see Virtual Infrastructure Tasks & Events. Processes dashboard provides control over processes and services running inside the guest OS of a VM. You can view, end or restart processes on Windows- based machines. You can view or end daemons on Linux-based machines. To view the list of processes, select the necessary VM in the inventory pane and open the Processes tab. For more details, see In-Guest Processes. Console dashboard lists in-guest processes and helps you diagnose problems related to a specific service, module or application. To access a VM console, select the necessary virtual machine in the inventory pane and open the Console tab. For more details, see VM Console. 159 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

160 Data Protection Monitoring Veeam ONE Monitor offers advanced functionality for monitoring Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure and data protection operations within the managed virtual environment. In Veeam ONE Monitor, you can: 1. Monitor the overall state of the backup infrastructure. Start with Summary dashboards to reveal hotspots in your Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure. You can quickly review the latest status of backup, replication and SureBackup jobs, examine configuration and performance of your backup infrastructure components, detect the most loaded proxies, repositories, WAN accelerators, tape servers, cloud gateways and cloud repositories, and check whether your jobs complete within the backup window. Summary dashboards help you quickly reveal issues that can lead to failing jobs, and thereafter, cause loss of valuable data. 2. View triggered alarms. Switch to the Alarms dashboard to see details on issues and problems in your backup infrastructure. Data protection alarms allow you to instantaneously react to potentially dangerous situations with ongoing data protection and take immediate actions to eliminate the risk of data loss. 3. Check the latest job status. Track the status of your backup, replication, SureBackup, backup copy, SQL database transaction log backup, backup to tape, files to tape, VM copy and file copy jobs to get up-todate information on the efficiency of data protection in your virtual environment and address problems with jobs as soon as they appear. 4. Work with performance charts. Drill down to performance charts to diagnose performance problems with backup infrastructure components and identify bottlenecks. You can track CPU, memory, disk and network performance for backup servers, proxies, repositories and WAN accelerators to make sure the backup data flow is efficient and all resources engaged in the backup process are optimally used. 5. View the list of events. View the full list of events that triggered Veeam Backup & Replication alarms, and events notifying about connection problems with Veeam Backup & Replication servers or Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager. Prerequisites Before you start monitoring your Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure, make sure you have configured connections to Veeam Backup & Replication servers from which Veeam ONE Monitor will collect data. For details on configuring server connections, see Connecting Veeam Backup & Replication Servers. 160 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

161 Data Protection Summary Dashboards Data protection summary dashboards serve as the 'launch point' for monitoring the backup infrastructure and data protection operations in the virtual environment. The dashboards reflect the latest state of backup, replication and SureBackup jobs and help analyze the performance and configuration of backup infrastructure components. The following types of summary dashboards are available for Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure objects: Backup Infrastructure Summary Backup Repositories Overview Backup Repository Summary Proxy Servers Overview Proxy Server Summary WAN Accelerators Overview WAN Accelerator Summary Tape Servers Overview Tape Server Summary Cloud Repositories Overview Cloud Repository Summary Cloud Gateways Overview Cloud Gateway Summary To view summary details for a specific backup infrastructure object or segment: 1. Open Data Protection View. 2. Select the necessary infrastructure level in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Summary tab in the information pane. Note: For proxy server, repository, WAN accelerator and tape server nodes, Veeam ONE Monitor offers 2 sets of summary dashboards. Summary dashboards aggregate performance details for the previous week. Monthly Summary dashboards aggregate performance details for the previous month. 161 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

162 Backup Infrastructure Summary This summary dashboard shows the latest state of data protection operations in your virtual environment and indicates the most intensively used resources in the backup infrastructure. The dashboard is available for the following nodes: Backup Infrastructure Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager Veeam Backup & Replication server Backup Jobs by Status, Replication Jobs by Status and SureBackup Jobs by Status charts reflect the latest status of backup, replication and SureBackup jobs for the selected level of the backup infrastructure hierarchy. Every chart segment shows how many jobs ended with a specific status successfully performed jobs (green), jobs that ended with warnings (yellow), failed jobs (red) and jobs that are currently running (blue). Click the necessary chart segment to drill-down to the list of jobs that ended up with the corresponding status. For more information, see Veeam Backup & Replication Jobs. Top Repository Servers by Used Space chart shows 5 backup repositories with the greatest amount of used storage space. For every repository in the chart, you can track the amount of used storage space against the amount of available space. If free space on the repository is running low, you might need to free up storage space, revise your backup retention policy or even move your backups from the repository and point backup jobs to a new location. Top Proxy Servers by Weekly Processed VMs chart shows 5 backup proxies that processed the greatest number of VM disks over the past 7 days. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE analyzes how many VM disk processing tasks were successfully performed by every proxy; failed tasks are not taken into account. The chart helps you detect the most heavily loaded backup proxies and optimize performance of your backup infrastructure. If specific proxies are overloaded with VM disk processing tasks, and the jobs often need to wait for proxy resources, you might need to 162 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

163 deploy additional proxies or balance the processing load by assigning backup jobs to other proxies. 163 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

164 Backup Repositories Overview Summary dashboard for the Repositories node provides a configuration overview and performance analysis for backup repositories managed by a Veeam Backup & Replication server. Repository Servers Overview section outlines the following details: The number of repositories managed by the Veeam Backup & Replication server The number of virtual machines in backups on the repositories Cumulative amount of storage space occupied by full VM backups Cumulative amount of storage space occupied by incremental VM backups Top Repository Servers by Used Space chart shows 5 backup repositories with the greatest amount of used storage space. For every repository in the chart, you can see the amount of used storage space against the amount of available space. If free space on the repository is running low, you might need to take some anticipatory action for example, free up storage space on the repository, revise your backup retention policy or even move your backups from the repository and point backup jobs to a new location. Top Repository Servers by Days Left chart shows 5 backup repositories that can run low on storage space sooner than others. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE Monitor analyzes historical data and checks how fast free space on repositories has been decreasing in the past. Veeam ONE Monitor uses this historical statistics to forecast how soon the repository will run out of space. Top Repository Servers by Weekly Backup Window chart allows you to detect the most busy repositories over the past 7 days. For every repository, the chart shows the cumulative amount of time that the repository was busy with backup and backup copy job tasks. 164 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

165 Backup Repository Summary The repository summary dashboard provides overview details, capacity planning information and performance analysis for the chosen backup repository. Repository Overview section outlines the following details: The number of tasks that are currently assigned to the repository The number of virtual machines in backups stored on the repository The amount of storage space occupied by full VM backups The amount of storage space occupied by incremental VM backups The number of VM disk processing tasks that can be assigned to the repository at the same time (as configured in backup repository settings) Capacity Planning section outlines the following details: Storage capacity of the repository The amount of free storage space on the repository The number of days before the repository runs out of free space. To forecast the value, Veeam ONE Monitor uses a trend that is calculated based on historical statistics it analyzes how fast the amount of free space on the repository was decreasing in the past and uses this historical statistics to forecast how soon the repository will run out of space. Free Space Usage chart shows the amount of used storage space against the amount of available space on the repository. If free space on the repository is running low, you might need to take some anticipatory action for example, free up storage space on the repository, revise your backup retention policy or even move your backups from the repository and point backup jobs to a new location. Backup Window Utilization chart shows the cumulative amount of time that the repository was busy with backup job tasks and backup copy job tasks during the past 7 days. 165 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

166 The chart can help you reveal possible resource bottlenecks on the repository side. If the backup window on the chart is abnormally large, this can evidence that the required I/O operations cannot complete fast enough, and your target is presenting a bottleneck for the whole backup data processing conveyor. To identify performance bottlenecks, you can switch to repository Performance Charts. 166 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

167 Proxy Servers Overview Summary dashboard for the Proxies node provides a configuration overview and performance analysis for backup proxies managed by a Veeam Backup & Replication server. Proxy Servers Overview section shows the breakdown of backup proxies by the transport mode. You can see how many VMware backup proxies retrieve VM data from source datastores using the Direct SAN Access, Hot Add or Network transport mode. If a backup proxy uses multiple modes to retrieve VM data from various source datastores, Veeam ONE Monitor will detect its primary transport mode quantitatively, based on the number of processed VM disks. For example, if a backup proxy processed 10 VM disks using the Hot Add mode and 20 VM disks using the Network mode, the proxy would be reported as a 'Network proxy server'. Top Proxy Servers by Processed VMs chart shows 5 backup proxies that processed the greatest number of VMs over the past 7 days. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE Monitor analyzes how many VM processing tasks were successfully performed by every proxy; failed tasks are not taken into account. For VMware backup proxies, the chart illustrates how many VMs every proxy processed using the Direct SAN Access, Hot Add or Network transport mode. The chart helps you detect the most heavily loaded backup proxies and optimize performance of your backup infrastructure. If specific proxies are overloaded with VM processing tasks, and the tasks often need to wait for proxy resources, you might need to deploy additional proxies or balance the processing load by assigning jobs to other proxies. Top Proxy by Transferred Data chart shows 5 backup proxies that transferred the greatest amount of backup data to the target destination (backup repository or replica datastore) over the past 7 days. For every backup proxy, the chart shows the total amount of data that the proxy transferred over the network after the source-side deduplication and compression. The chart can help you detect backup proxies that transfer the greatest amount of backup data and estimate the load that backup and replication jobs impose on the network. Top Proxy Servers by Weekly Backup Window chart allows you to detect the most 'busy' proxy servers over the past 7 days. For every proxy, the chart shows the cumulative amount of time that the proxy was retrieving, processing and transferring VM data. 167 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

168 The chart can help you reveal possible resource bottlenecks. If the backup window on the chart is abnormally large, this can evidence of low source data retrieval speed, high proxy CPU load or insufficient network throughput. Charts in this dashboard can help you detect configuration inefficiencies in your data protection infrastructure. If the same proxy server appears to process a great number of VM disks, transfer the greatest amount of backup data and use the largest backup window, you might need to re-balance the VM processing load across your backup proxies. The charts may also help you reveal 'lazy' proxies that you might decide to decommission. 168 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

169 Proxy Server Summary Proxy summary dashboard provides overview details and performance analysis for the chosen backup proxy. Proxy Server Overview section outlines the following details: The number of backup and replication tasks that the proxy is currently processing Transport mode that the proxy uses to process VM disks (Direct SAN Access, Hot Add or Network) The number of VMs that the proxy has processed during the past 7 days The number of VM disk processing tasks that can be assigned to the proxy at the same time (as configured in proxy settings) Number of Processed VMs chart shows how many VMs the proxy processed over the past 7 days. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE Monitor analyzes how many VM processing tasks were successfully performed by the proxy; failed tasks are not taken into account. The chart helps you to analyze workload on the proxy and optimize performance of your backup infrastructure. If the proxy is overloaded with processing tasks, and the tasks often need to wait for the proxy resources, you might need to deploy additional proxies or balance the processing load by assigning jobs to other proxies. Transferred Data chart shows the amount of backup data that the proxy transferred to the target destination (backup repository or replica datastore) over the past 7 days. The chart shows the total amount of data that the proxy transferred over the network after the sourceside deduplication and compression. The chart can also help you measure the amount of backup traffic coming from the proxy. Backup Window Utilization chart allows you to estimate how 'busy' the proxy was during the past 7 days. The chart shows the cumulative amount of time that the proxy was retrieving, processing and transferring VM data. The chart can help you reveal possible resource bottlenecks. If the backup window on the chart is abnormally large, this can evidence of low source data retrieval speed, high proxy 169 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

170 CPU load or insufficient network throughput.to identify performance bottlenecks, you can switch to proxy Performance Charts. 170 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

171 WAN Accelerators Overview Summary dashboard for the WAN Accelerators node provides a configuration overview and performance analysis for WAN accelerators managed by a Veeam Backup & Replication server. WAN Accelerator Overview section outlines the following details: The number of WAN accelerators managed by the Veeam Backup & Replication server The number of restore points transferred by WAN accelerators during backup copy job and replication job sessions Cumulative amount of network traffic transferred by WAN accelerators to the target destination (secondary repositories or replica datastore) Cumulative amount of saved traffic that is, the difference between the amount of VM data that was read from the source location (source repository or datastore) and the amount of data that was actually transferred to the target destination (secondary repository or replica datastore) Top WAN Accelerators by Traffic Savings chart shows 5 pairs of WAN accelerators that saved the greatest amount of traffic over the past 7 days. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE Monitor analyzes the difference between the amount of VM data read from the source location (source repository or datastore) and the amount of data that was actually transferred to the target destination (secondary repository or replica datastore) over the past 7 days. Top WAN Accelerators by Transferred Data chart shows 5 pairs of WAN accelerators that transferred the greatest amount of VM data over the past 7 days. Every graph in the chart shows the total amount of VM data that was sent from the source-side accelerator to the target-side accelerator over the network. Top WAN Accelerators by Transferred Restore Points chart shows 5 pairs of WAN accelerators that transferred the greatest number of restore points over the past 7 days. Charts in this dashboard can help you estimate the efficiency of VM data transfer over WAN links. Comparing the amount of transferred and saved traffic, you can measure how the amount of VM traffic was reduced by means of Veeam WAN acceleration. 171 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

172 WAN Accelerator Summary WAN accelerator summary dashboard presents overview details and performance analysis for the chosen WAN accelerator. WAN Accelerator Overview section outlines the following details: The number of restore points transferred or received by the WAN accelerator during backup copy job or replication job sessions (if the same server acts as a target- and source-side accelerator at the same time, the dashboard will show aggregate values for transferred and received restore points) The amount of network traffic transferred from the accelerator to target The amount of saved traffic the difference between the amount of VM data that was read from the source location (source repository or datastore) and the amount of data that was actually transferred to the target destination (secondary repository or replica datastore). Traffic Savings by Day chart shows the amount of saved traffic the difference between the amount of VM data that was read from the source location (source repository or datastore) and the amount of data that was actually transferred to the target destination (secondary repository or replica datastore) over the past 7 days. Transferred Data by Day chart shows the amount of transferred VM data over the previous week. Every graph in the chart shows the total amount of VM data that was sent to and from the WAN accelerator over the past 7 days. Transferred Restore Points by Day chart shows the number of restore points transferred to and from the WAN accelerator over the past 7 days. 172 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

173 Tape Servers Overview Summary dashboard for the Tape Servers node presents a configuration overview and performance analysis for tape servers managed by a Veeam Backup & Replication server. Tape Servers Overview section shows the number of tape servers managed by a Veeam Backup & Replication server, and tape libraries connected to these servers. Top Tape Servers by Processed VMs chart shows 5 tape servers that processed and archived to tape the greatest number of VMs over the past 7 days. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE calculates the total number of VMs in all backup restore points archived to tape. Top Tape Servers by Transferred Data chart shows 5 tape servers that transferred the greatest amount of data to tape devices over the past 7 days. Top Tape Servers Utilization chart allows you to detect the most 'busy' tape servers over the past 7 days. For every tape server, the chart shows the cumulative amount of time that the server was retrieving, processing and transferring data. The chart can help you reveal possible resource bottlenecks. If the graph on the chart is abnormally large, this can evidence of low data retrieval speed, high CPU load or insufficient network throughput. 173 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

174 Tape Server Summary Tape server summary dashboard provides overview information and performance analysis for the chosen tape server. Tape Server Overview section outlines the number of tape libraries connected to the tape server Number of Processed VMs chart shows how many VMs the tape server processed and archived to tape over the past 7 days. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE calculates the total number of VMs in all backup restore points archived to tape. Transferred Data chart shows the amount of data that the tape server transferred to tape devices over the past 7 days. The chart can help you measure the amount of traffic coming from the tape server. Backup Window Utilization chart allows you to estimate how busy the tape server was during the past 7 days. The chart shows the cumulative amount of time that the tape server was retrieving, processing and transferring data. The chart can help you reveal possible resource bottlenecks. If the backup window on the chart is abnormally large, this can evidence of low source data retrieval speed, high CPU load or insufficient network throughput. 174 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

175 Cloud Repositories Overview Summary dashboard for the Cloud Repositories node presents a configuration overview and storage utilization analysis for cloud repositories (repositories allocated for users by Veeam Cloud Connect Service Providers). Cloud Repositories Overview section outlines the following details: The number of cloud repositories created for Veeam Cloud Connect users The number of cloud repository leases that will expire within 30 days The number of virtual machines in backups on cloud repositories Cumulative amount of storage space occupied by VM backups on all managed cloud repositories Top Cloud Repositories by Utilization chart shows 5 cloud repositories with the greatest amount of used storage space. For every repository in the chart, you can see the amount of used storage space against the amount of available space. If free space on the repository is running low, you might need to increase the repository quota. Top Cloud Repositories with Least Days Left chart shows 5 cloud repositories that can run low on storage space sooner than others. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE Monitor analyzes historical data and checks how fast free space on repositories has been decreasing in the past. Veeam ONE Monitor uses this historical statistics to forecast how soon the repository will run out of space. Top Cloud Repositories by Daily Utilization Growth chart allows you to detect how fast the amount of used space on repositories increased over the past 7 days. For every repository, the chart shows the daily disk space growth usage rate (the average increase in GB per day). 175 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

176 Cloud Repository Summary Cloud repository summary dashboard provides overview details and space utilization analysis for the chosen cloud repository (repository allocated for a user by a Veeam Cloud Connect Service Provider). Cloud Repository Overview section outlines the following details: Name of the user that owns the cloud repository Date when the repository lease is set to expire The number of virtual machines in backups stored on the cloud repository The amount of storage space occupied by VM backups on the cloud repository Capacity Planning section outlines the following details: User quota, that is the amount of space allocated to a user The amount of free storage space on the cloud repository The number of days before the cloud repository runs out of free space. To forecast the value, Veeam ONE Monitor uses a trend that is calculated based on historical statistics it analyzes how fast the amount of free space on the repository was decreasing in the past and uses this historical statistics to forecast how soon the repository will run out of space. Space Utilization by Day chart shows the amount of used storage space against the amount of available space on the cloud repository. If free space on the repository is running low, you might need to increase the repository quota. Number of VMs by Day chart shows the number of VMs whose backups were written to the repository during the past 7 days. 176 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

177 Cloud Gateways Overview Summary dashboard for the Cloud Gateways node presents a configuration overview and performance analysis for cloud gateways managed by a Veeam Backup & Replication server. Cloud Gateway Overview section outlines the following details: Number of cloud gateways managed by the Veeam Backup & Replication server Total number of unique user connections over the past 7 days Total amount of backup data that was transferred through all cloud gateways Top Cloud Gateways by User Connections chart shows 5 most loaded cloud gateways in terms of user connections. To draw the chart, Veeam ONE Monitor calculates how many unique users connected to each cloud gateway over the past 7 days. Top Cloud Gateways by Processed Data chart shows 5 cloud gateways that transferred the greatest amount of data to cloud repositories over the past 7 days. The chart can help you detect cloud gateways that transfer the greatest amount of backup data and estimate the load on gateways. Top Cloud Gateways by Utilization chart allows you to detect the most busy cloud gateways over the past 7 days. For every cloud gateway, the chart shows the cumulative amount of time that the gateway was retrieving, processing and transferring data to cloud repositories. The chart can help you reveal possible resource bottlenecks. If the graph on the chart is abnormally large, this can evidence of high CPU load or insufficient throughput. 177 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

178 Cloud Gateway Summary Summary dashboard for a cloud gateway presents overview information and performance analysis for the chosen gateway. Cloud Gateway Overview section outlines the following details: Number of users that are currently connected to the gateway TCP/IP port configured for external connections on the cloud gateway User Sessions chart shows the number of unique users that connected to the cloud gateway over the past 7 days to transfer backup traffic. Processed Data chart shows the amount of backup data that the cloud gateway transferred to the cloud repository over the past 7 days. The chart can help you measure the cumulative amount of backup traffic coming through the cloud gateway. Utilization chart allows you to estimate how busy the cloud gateway was during the past 7 days. The chart shows the cumulative amount of time that the cloud gateway was retrieving, processing and transferring backup data. The chart can help you reveal possible resource bottlenecks. If the utilization graph on the chart is abnormally large, this can evidence of high CPU load or insufficient throughput. 178 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

179 Data Protection Alarms Veeam ONE Monitor includes a set of alarms for monitoring the efficiency of Veeam Backup & Replication data protection in the virtual environment. Predefined data protection alarms are configured to warn you about events or issues that can cause loss of data or prevent Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure from functioning properly: Connectivity issues and inability of backup infrastructure components to communicate with each other State of Veeam Backup & Replication software installed on backup infrastructure components Failing jobs or jobs finished with warnings Configuration issues, such as fast decreasing space on backup repositories or cloud repositories Long-running jobs that exceed the backup window Veeam Backup & Replication license and prepaid support contract To view the list of data protection alarms: 1. Open the Data Protection View. 2. Select the necessary backup infrastructure node in the inventory pane. 3. Open to the Alarms tab. 179 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

180 Configuring Custom Alarms for Veeam Backup & Replication If predefined data protection alarms do not cover important events, conditions or state changes about which you need to be notified, you can customize these alarms or create custom alarms. This section includes an example on customizing a predefined alarm. The example is based on the following case: According to your RPO requirements, you need to have daily backups for mission-critical VMs. If for some reason VMs are not protected with daily backups, you need to receive an alarm informing that backups are missing or outdated. To configure an alarm that will notify about missing or outdated backups, follow these steps: 1. Click Alarm Management at the bottom of the inventory pane. 2. In the alarm management tree, select the Virtual Machine node. 3. In the list of predefined alarms, double-click the alarm VM with no backups. The Alarm settings window will open. 4. Open the General tab and choose the Enable this alarm check box. 5. Open the Rules tab and make sure the rule conditions are specified as follows: Rule type: Backup RPO Backup interval (Hours): 24 Alert severity: Warning 180 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

181 6. Open the Assignment tab and perform the following steps: a. Remove Virtual Infrastructure from the alarm assignment scope. b. Click Add and choose VMs to which the alarm will be assigned. 7. Specify other alarm settings and click OK to save the alarm. If for chosen VMs there are no backups created within 24 hours, Veeam ONE Monitor will trigger the configured alarms. 181 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

182 Notes The first alarms will be triggered in 24 hours (that is, the specified RPO period) If no backups for a VM are present, the time of the latest backup will be the VM creation time. 182 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

183 Data Protection Performance Charts To identify performance bottlenecks within the backup data flow, you can drill down to the following performance charts: CPU Performance Chart Memory Performance Chart Disk Performance Chart Network Performance Chart To draw the charts, Veeam ONE Monitor gathers Windows Performance Monitor metrics from the guest OS of backup infrastructure components (for this reason, performance charts for Linux-based repositories are not available). You can track performance metrics for physical and virtual backup servers, proxies, repositories, WAN accelerators or Enterprise Manager server. To drill down to a performance chart for a backup infrastructure component: 1. Open the Data Protection View. 2. In the backup infrastructure hierarchy, choose the necessary backup infrastructure component. 3. Open the necessary performance chart tab. For performance charts in the Data Protection View, Veeam ONE Monitor supports a similar set of actions as for virtual infrastructure performance charts: you can change chart views and set time intervals, define objects to show on charts or select custom metrics. For more details, see Customizing Performance Charts. 183 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

184 CPU Performance Chart The CPU chart shows the amount of used processor resources on a machine where a backup infrastructure component runs. Graphs in the CPU chart illustrate the level of processor usage for every separate CPU on the machine. The Total graph shows the cumulative processor utilization for all CPUs. By default, the chart shows the amount of processor time used to run all processes. To view what amount of CPU resources is consumed by each backup, backup copy or replication job assigned to the selected backup infrastructure component, choose the Backup jobs option from the View mode list. 184 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

185 Memory Performance Chart The Memory chart shows the amount of used memory resources on a machine where a backup infrastructure component runs. Graphs in the Memory chart illustrate the amount of total available memory and memory that is currently used on the machine. By default, the chart shows the amount of memory used to run all processes. To view what amount of memory resources is consumed by each backup, backup copy or replication job assigned to the selected backup infrastructure component, choose the Backup jobs option from the View mode list. 185 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

186 Disk Performance Chart The Disk chart shows the rate at which the disk is transferring data during read and write operations. Disk usage is shown as an average for all physical disks on a machine where a backup infrastructure component runs. 186 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

187 Network Performance Chart The Network chart shows the throughput for NICs on a machine where a backup infrastructure component runs. Graphs in the Network chart illustrate the rate at which data is sent on the network interface for each separate NIC. A separate graph shows the cumulative rate for all NICs on the machine. 187 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

188 Veeam Backup & Replication Jobs You can monitor backup, replication, SureBackup, backup copy, backup to tape, SQL database transaction log backup, files to tape, VM copy and file copy jobs configured to protect the virtual environment. You can track real-time job statistics at different levels of your backup infrastructure: Jobs on a specific Veeam Backup & Replication server Jobs on all backup servers controlled by Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager All jobs across the entire backup infrastructure To view a list of jobs at the necessary backup infrastructure level: 1. Open the Data Protection View. 2. Select the necessary backup infrastructure node in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Jobs tab. Viewing Job Details The list of jobs shows all backup, replication, SureBackup, backup copy, backup to tape, SQL database transaction log backup, files to tape, VM copy and file copy jobs for the backup infrastructure level that you selected in the inventory pane. For every job, the following details are available: Status the latest status of the job (Success, Warning, Failed, Running, Idle or jobs with no status) Name job name Type job type (Backup, Replication, SureBackup, Backup Copy, Backup to Tape, File Copy, VM Copy or SQL Database Transaction Log) Last Run date and time when the job was performed for the last time Duration time taken to complete the job during its latest run 188 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

189 Avg. Duration (Last Month) average time it took to complete the job (total job duration time for the previous month divided by the number of times the job ran) Transferred Data (GB) amount of backup data that was transferred to the target destination (backup repository or replication target datastore) during the latest job run Note: The No info label indicates that no information is available for the job because data has not been collected yet. By analyzing job details, you can reveal potential problems with the efficiency of data protection operations. For example, if job duration has significantly increased in comparison with the average monthly duration value, while there are no noticeable changes to the amount of transferred data, you might need to investigate the root cause. Such a behavior might evidence that the job has to wait for proxy resources, which increases the backup window. Finding Jobs You can use filters at the top of the Jobs dashboard to quickly find the necessary jobs. You can filter jobs by the following criteria: To show or hide jobs that ended with a specific status, use the status buttons at the top of the list Show failed jobs, Show jobs with warnings, Show successful jobs, Show running jobs, Show jobs with no status or Show idle jobs. To show or hide jobs of a specific type, use the job type buttons at the top of the list Show all jobs, Show backup jobs, Show replication jobs, Show SureBackup jobs, Show backup copy jobs, Show backup to tape jobs, Show VM and file copy jobs and Show SQL database transaction log backup jobs. To set the time interval when jobs ran for the last time, use the Filter jobs by time period button. Release the button to discard the time period filter. To find jobs by name, use the search field at the top right corner of the Jobs dashboard. You can click column names to sort jobs by a specific parameter. For example, to view jobs that took longest to complete, you can sort alarms in the list by Duration. 189 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

190 Viewing the List of VMs in Backups You can view the list of virtual machines stored in backups on repositories: 1. Open the Data Protection View. 2. Select the necessary repository in the inventory pane. 3. Open the VMs tab. For every virtual machine in the list, the following details are shown: Latest Backup the latest status of the job that created the VM backup (Success, Warning, Faile or Running) Name name of the virtual machine stored in a backup on the repository Latest Restore Point date and time when the latest restore point was created for the VM Restore Points number of restore points created for the VM Job name of a backup or backup copy job that created VM backup Job Type type of a job that created VM backup (Backup job or Copy job) Next Job Run schedule according to which the job will start next time You can click column names to sort virtual machines by a specific parameter. For example, to view what virtual machines do not have recent backups, you can sort VMs in the list by Latest Restore Point. You can use the search at the top of the list to quickly find VMs by name. 190 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

191 Monitoring Veeam Backup & Replication Events The Tasks & Events dashboard of Veeam ONE Monitor shows the history of events that triggered Veeam Backup & Replication alarms. For the list and detailed description of data protection alarms, see Veeam Backup & Replication Alarms. To view the list of events for a specific level: 1. Open the Data Protection View. 2. Select the necessary backup infrastructure node in the inventory pane. 3. Open the Tasks & Events tab. By default, the Tasks & Events view contains data on the past hour. To change the time range for displayed event, select a necessary time interval in the Events from list. Note that the list can display up to 1000 events at a time. To find the necessary events by event description, you can use the Search field at the top of the list. For every event, the following information is provided: event type (Info, Warning or Error), short description, time of occurrence, event target and the object that initiated the event. To view a detailed description of an event, click it in the list, and the event data will be displayed in the Event Details pane of the Events dashboard. In addition to viewing events for a specific backup infrastructure object, you can also display events for its child objects: select the Include events from child objects check box at the bottom of the Event Details section. 191 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

192 Generating Reports To obtain a point-in-time view of your virtual infrastructure and data protection operations, you can create reports from the Veeam ONE Monitor console: 1. Open the necessary view Infrastructure View, vcloud Director View, Business View or Data Protection View. 2. Choose the report to run: Click the Report button on the toolbar and choose the necessary report in the list. Right-click the necessary infrastructure object or a node in the inventory tree, click Reports and choose the necessary report in the list. 3. On the Veeam ONE Reporter login page, enter user credentials to access the Reporter console. 4. On the report details page, specify the report parameters. 5. Click Create Report in the Actions pane on the right. You can quickly switch to the Veeam ONE Reporter Dashboard and generate any other reports supplied by Veeam ONE Reporter. To do so, click View all reports in the Actions pane on the right. 192 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

193 VEEAM ONE REPORTER Veeam ONE Reporter part of an integrated Veeam ONE solution is designed for documenting and reporting on your Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure and virtual environment. Veeam ONE Reporter allows you to automatically discover and collect information about your VMware vsphere, vcloud Director environment, its components, configuration settings, performance and track the efficiency of data protection performed with Veeam Backup & Replication. Veeam ONE Reporter offers comprehensive visual reports and dashboards for documentation, analysis, decision-making, change tracking, capacity planning and optimization of resource utilization. This chapter covers functionality available with Veeam ONE Reporter, provides guidelines for its initial configuration and describes reporting possibilities for your VMware vsphere, vcloud Director environment and Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure. Accessing Veeam ONE Reporter To start working with Veeam ONE Reporter: 1. Access the Veeam ONE Reporter website using one of the following options: You can access Veeam ONE Reporter directly from the Veeam ONE Monitor console. For details, see Generating Reports. You can open Veeam ONE Reporter locally, on the machine where the Veeam ONE Web UI component is installed. To do so, in the Windows Programs menu choose Veeam ONE Reporter. You can access Veeam ONE Reporter remotely using your web browser. To do so, browse to the following address (assuming the default port 1239): 2. Provide credentials for the user account that is either: A member of the Veeam ONE Administrators or Veeam ONE Read-Only Users group (these are user groups created on the machine where the Veeam ONE Web UI component is installed). Has permissions assigned on objects of the vcenter Server or vcloud Director inventory hierarchy. For details, see Veeam ONE Multi-Tenant Monitoring and Reporting. 3. If you log in for the first time, configure your browser settings as follows: Make sure that pop-up windows are allowed for the Veeam ONE Reporter website. [For Internet Explorer] Add the Veeam ONE Reporter website to the list of Trusted sites. 193 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

194 Navigating Veeam ONE Reporter The Veeam ONE Reporter window includes three working areas Dashboard, Workspace and Configuration. In the Dashboard section, you can work with prebuilt and custom dashboards. Veeam ONE dashboards provide at-a-glance view on the state of the Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure and virtual environment, and present information on the health state, performance, configuration and other aspects of the managed environment. For details, see Dashboards. In the Workspace section, you can work with reports. Reports provide an insight into historical performance, health, configuration and efficiency aspects of the Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure and virtual environment. For details, see Reports. In the Configuration section, you can change default Veeam ONE Reporter settings and perform administrative tasks, such as schedule data collection for reports and dashboards. For details, see Configuring Veeam ONE Reporter. 194 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

195 Configuring Veeam ONE Reporter Veeam ONE Reporter does not require complex configuration and is ready for use right after the installation. However, before you start using Veeam ONE Reporter, you might need to check and adjust its default configuration. 1. Review Veeam ONE Reporter configuration summary. 2. Schedule data collection for connected Veeam Backup & Replication and virtual infrastructure servers. 3. Check extension modules and Veeam ONE Reporter settings and update them if necessary. To access configuration settings of Veeam ONE Reporter, use the Configuration tab. Note: To be able to access the Configuration section, a user must be a member of the Veeam ONE Administrators group on a machine where the Veeam ONE Web UI component is installed. For details on Veeam ONE security groups, refer to the Veeam ONE Deployment Guide. Configuration Summary Before you configure Veeam ONE Reporter settings, review the configuration summary: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Summary in the Configuration section menu. The Configuration summary section gives you a quick overview of the current Veeam ONE Reporter configuration and helps reveal possible configuration problems. If Veeam ONE Reporter detects any configuration problems, it will open the Configuration summary section every time when you switch to the Configuration view. To view configuration summary details, expand the Server collection state, Server state and License state sections. The Server collection state section shows information about connected servers and results of the latest collection sessions. The figures on the right show the number of servers for which the latest data collection completed successfully or ended with warnings/errors. To switch to the list of connected servers, click the View details link. If you do not have any connected servers yet, connect them in the Veeam ONE Monitor console. For details, see Connecting Servers. 195 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

196 The Server state section shows the state of the scheduling service that is responsible for data collection and scheduled report delivery. To view details on the server state and version, click the View details link. The License state section displays information about the installed license. For your convenience, Veeam ONE displays configuration status icons next to section titles. Status icons illustrate the configuration state of a corresponding component. For example, if your license has expired and needs to be updated, an error icon will be shown in the License state section. Configuration summary icons allow you to quickly identify what configuration settings need to be adjusted or updated. 196 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

197 Servers To start working with dashboards and reports, you need to collect data from Veeam Backup & Replication servers and virtual infrastructure servers. Server connections can be configured either during Veeam ONE installation or you can connect servers later, via the Veeam ONE Monitor console. In Veeam ONE Reporter, you can review configured connections, change data collection scheduling settings or run data collection manually. To view server connections and configure data collection settings for Veeam ONE Reporter: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Servers in the Configuration section menu. Scheduling Data Collection All new connections to Veeam Backup & Replication and virtual infrastructure servers are configured with the same scheduling settings. By default, Veeam ONE reporting component runs data collection from these servers on weekdays, at 3:00 a.m. You can customize data collection schedule for specific servers: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Servers in the Configuration section menu. 3. Select the server for which you want to change data collection schedule and click Scheduling on the toolbar. Alternatively, double-click the server in the list. If you are planning to collect data from the server manually, clear the Collect data automatically check box. If you are planning to collect data from the server according to a specific schedule, leave the Collect data automatically check box selected and set the necessary schedule. To run data collection with specific time intervals, select the Periodically every hours option and specify the interval at which data collection should start. Note: The recommended interval between data collection sessions is 4 hours or more. If you schedule several data collection sessions to run with a lower interval, the collection schedules may overlap, which will lead to an extra overhead on the Veeam ONE database. To run data collection every day at specific time, select the Daily at this time option and specify the time of the day when data collection should start. In the Choose days section, select weekdays on which data collection should run. 3. Click OK to apply settings. 197 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

198 Running Data Collection For each connected Veeam Backup & Replication and virtual infrastructure server, you can specify whether you want to collect data from the server automatically or manually. If you schedule data collection to run automatically, Veeam ONE Reporter will start the collection session according to the specified schedule. Otherwise, you will need to run data collection manually. To manually start or stop data collection: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Servers in the Configuration section menu. 3. Select the necessary server in the list and click the Run now/stop button on the toolbar. Viewing Collection Session Details Every run of a data collection initiates a new collection session. To view details on collection sessions: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Sessions in the Configuration section menu. The list of sessions provides information on all performed data collections. Every session is described with the following details: Session completion status Name of the server for which a session has been initiated Session start and end date and time Data collection type 198 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

199 To display detailed information on a specific session, click the session in the list. Finding Sessions To easily find the necessary session, you can apply the following filters: Job Type limit the list of sessions by data collection type Start Date/End Date limit the list of sessions by the time when the session was performed You can sort the list of sessions by completion status, server, data collection type, start date or end date. Click an arrow to the right of a corresponding column heading and choose to sort sessions in the ascending or descending order. Alternatively, you can simply click the column heading. 199 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

200 Extension Modules In the Extension Modules section, you can customize miscellaneous settings of the Veeam ONE Reporter configuration. The settings are grouped into the following tabs: Modules On this tab, you can manage Veeam ONE extension modules. Report Branding On this tab, you can replace the default report header with a custom image. SSRS Server On this tab, you can specify settings of the Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services server to be used for integration with Veeam ONE Reporter. Report Management On this tab, you can export and import custom report templates. To work with the extension module settings: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Extension Modules in the Configuration section menu. Managing Modules Extension modules are add-on elements that can be deployed to enhance the Veeam ONE Reporter functionality. The following types of extension modules are available: Widget pack a set of widgets for custom dashboards Report pack a set of reports Resource pack an archive with common components used for reports and dashboards (such as images, report parameters and so on) Hotfix a possible hotfix for Veeam ONE Extension modules are installed automatically in the process of Veeam ONE installation. On the Modules tab, you can manage already installed extension modules and install new modules. 200 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

201 Installing New Modules If the machine where Veeam ONE Reporter runs is connected to Internet, Veeam ONE will periodically check for updates. When new report packs, widget packs or possible hotfixes are released, Veeam ONE Reporter will display a message notifying about available updates and details on how to download the archive with updates. After you download the archive, you can install the new modules: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Extension Modules in the Configuration section menu. 3. Open the Modules tab. 4. Click Install on the toolbar and specify path to the archive with the updates. Deleting Modules If you no longer need an extension module, you can delete it. You can only delete custom extension modules (modules that have been provided by Veeam for support purposes). Inbuilt extension modules cannot be deleted. To delete an extension module: 1. Open the Configuration tab. 2. Click Extension Modules in the Configuration section menu. 3. Open the Modules tab. 4. Choose the necessary module in the list and click Delete. 201 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

202 Customizing Report Branding You can replace the default report header with a custom image (for example, with an image displaying your company logo) to customize appearance of reports according to your company branding. Note: The image file must be saved in the.png format and should have the following dimensions: 47px x 5000px. The width of the image is dictated by the greatest width that can be observed in Veeam ONE reports. If a report is less than 5000px width, the right part of the image will be cropped to fit the report width. For this reason, it is recommended to place the corporate logo or other graphics closer to the left part of the image. To customize the report header: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Extension Modules in the Configuration section menu. 3. Open the Report Branding tab. 4. Click Browse and specify path to the custom report image file. 5. Click Upload. To restore the default report header, use the Reset to default button in the Upload custom report image dialog box. 202 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

203 Configuring SSRS Server Settings When you report on a large virtual infrastructure, you may experience slowdowns with generating reports. In this case, you can integrate an SSRS server with Veeam ONE Reporter and use this SSRS server as an alternative to the default Veeam ONE report viewer. You can specify access settings to the Microsoft SQL Reporting Services server that will be used for integration with Veeam ONE Reporter: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Extension Modules in the Configuration section menu. 3. Open the SSRS Settings tab. 4. Select the Use Microsoft SQL Server Reporting Services check box. 5. In the SSRS server URL field, enter the address of the SSRS hosting server. The URL should be specified in the following format: To check if this URL is correct, launch the Reporting Services Configuration Manager and check the Web Service URL section. 6. Enter a user name and a password to connect to the SSRS server. The user name must be specified in the DOMAIN\USERNAME format. 7. To verify SSRS server settings, click the Test Connection button. Veeam ONE Reporter will display verification results on a summary screen. Note: If reports and folders are accidentally deleted, you can publish report packs back to Veeam ONE Reporter. To republish report packs, use the Republish report packs button. 203 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

204 Exporting and Importing Report Templates You can export saved user report templates to an.xml file and import report templates from an.xml file. Exporting and importing can be useful if you need to back up custom-designed report templates, or if you want to copy report templates from one Veeam ONE deployment to another. To export saved user report templates to an.xml file: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Extension Modules in the Configuration section menu. 3. Open the Report Management tab. 4. Click Export. 5. In the Export reports window, select reports that you want to export. 6. Click OK. The selected report templates will be exported to an.xml file and saved to the download location on your machine. To import saved user report templates from an.xml file: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Extension Modules in the Configuration section menu. 3. Open the Report Management tab. 4. Click Import. 5. In the Import reports window, specify path to the.xml file that describes report templates and choose a folder to which report templates must be imported. 6. Click OK. Report templates from the.xml file will be installed to the specified folder. 204 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

205 205 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

206 Viewing General Configuration Details To access Veeam ONE Reporter configuration details: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click About in the Configuration section menu. In the About section, you can view the following product details: Website information section displays the current version of the product and the location of the log files for the Veeam ONE Reporter Web UI. Server information section displays Veeam ONE Server component details the status of the Veeam ONE Reporter Server, Veeam ONE version, the machine where the Veeam ONE Server runs and the location of the log files. 206 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

207 Dashboards Veeam ONE Reporter dashboards provide at-a-glance view on the managed Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure and virtual environment. Dashboards aggregate key data on a single screen and allow you to focus on critical areas of the Veeam Backup & Replication and virtual infrastructure, learn about its health state and the track most important aspects. You can view dashboards in the web browser, deliver dashboards by or integrate dashboards into the intranet web portals, such as Microsoft SharePoint. Every dashboard includes a set of visual components called widgets. Widgets are visual modules that portray various aspects of the managed environment in the form of charts, graphs or tables. Veeam ONE Reporter comes with 7 predefined dashboards for the VMware vsphere environment and 1 predefined dashboard for Veeam Backup & Replication. In addition to predefined dashboards, you can create custom dashboards that will provide detailed information on particular aspects of your virtual infrastructure and data protection operations. Accessing Dashboards To access dashboards in Veeam ONE Reporter, open the Dashboards tab. The Dashboards section displays preview images for available dashboards (these are dashboards for which data has been collected from connected servers). You can re-arrange the order of dashboards by dragging their preview images to the necessary position in the Dashboard section. To open a particular dashboard, do one of the following: Click the dashboard preview image. Open the menu at the top right corner of the dashboard and click View dashboard. 207 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

208 Dashboards are composed of widgets that display various aspects of the managed environment. Every widget is located in a separate cell, or entry, in the dashboard. For some widgets, you can change display options. To do so, open the menu at the top right corner of the widget and select whether you want to display the legend below the chart or view data labels in the chart. To get back to the list of dashboards, click the Dashboards tab at the top of the page or click the Back button in the web browser. 208 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

209 Creating Dashboards In addition to working with predefined dashboards, you can create custom dashboards and add custom widgets to this dashboard. To create a custom-designed dashboard, perform the following steps: 1. Create a new dashboard and specify its settings. At this step, you must create a new dashboard, specify its name and description and choose the layout for dashboard widgets. 2. Add widgets to the dashboard. At this step, you must add custom widgets to the new dashboard and specify widget settings. Step 1. Specify Dashboard Settings and Select the Dashboard Layout To create a new dashboard: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click the plus icon in an empty cell. 3. In the Add dashboard window, specify dashboard settings: In the Name field, specify the name that will be displayed at the top of the dashboard. In the Description field, specify a brief description for the dashboard. In the Layout section, choose how widgets must be arranged on the dashboard. Select how many columns you want to display and the preferred width of these columns. Note that you can always change the existing layout later on using the dashboard Edit menu. 209 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

210 4. Click OK. A new empty dashboard will be created and added onto the Dashboards view. Veeam ONE Reporter will automatically open the created dashboard so that you can add dashboard widgets to it. 210 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

211 Step 2. Add Widgets to the Dashboard After you create a new dashboard, you must add widgets to it. You can add the following types of widgets: Ready-to-use widgets from widget packs Report-based widgets from report packs Report-based widgets with custom charts and tables Adding Widgets from Widget Packs Veeam ONE Reporter comes with a set of widgets packs for Veeam Backup & Replication and VMware vsphere. Widget packs include ready-to-use widgets that portray various aspects of the managed environment. You can add widgets from widget packs to custom-designed dashboards. To add to a dashboard a widget from a widget pack: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Edit dashboard. 3. Click the plus icon in one of the dashboard cells to launch the Add widget wizard. 4. At the Widget pack step of the wizard, specify the widget name and choose the widget pack. a. In the Caption field, specify the widget name. The widget name will be displayed at the top of the widget on the dashboard. You can leave the field empty if you do not want to display the widget caption. b. Choose the necessary widget pack. On the right, you can see a sample presentation of widgets included into the selected widget pack, and a brief description of the pack. This will give you a hint of what information will be analyzed and displayed in the widget. Double-click the necessary pack or select a pack and click Next. 211 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

212 5. At the Widget step of the wizard, choose the widget to add on the dashboard. In the field on the right, you can see an image with a preview of the widget style. This will give you a hint of how the widget will look on the dashboard. Double-click the necessary widget or select the widget in the list and click Next. 6. At the Options step of the wizard, define widget options, such as the scope, time interval, number of objects to display in the widget and so on. Availability of widget options depends on the type of the selected widget. 212 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

213 7. Click Finish to add the widget to the dashboard. 8. Repeat steps 3-7 for each new widget you want to add to the dashboard. 213 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

214 Adding Widgets from Report Packs A number of reports in Veeam ONE Reporter have associated widgets that you can add to custom dashboards. You can create widgets for the following reports: Cluster Configuration Datastore Capacity Hypervisor Version Inefficient Datastore Usage Infrastructure Changes by User Infrastructure Changes by Object Before you add a widget from a report pack, you must choose an associated report and save it with the necessary parameters: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary report and specify the required report parameters. 3. Save the report. For details, see Saving Reports. Next, add to a dashboard a widget associated with the saved report: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Edit dashboard. 3. Click the plus icon in one of the dashboard cells to launch the Add widget wizard. 4. At the Widget pack step of the wizard, specify the widget name and choose the widget pack. a. In the Caption field, specify the widget name. The widget name will be displayed at the top of the widget on the dashboard. You can leave the field empty if you do not want to display the widget caption. a. Double-click Report based widgets or select the Report based widgets option and click Next. 214 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

215 5. At the Widget step of the wizard, choose the saved report. Reports that do not have any associated widgets are grayed-out in the list. Double-click the selected report or select the report and click Next. 215 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

216 6. At the Options step of the wizard, select the widget type and click Finish. 7. Click Finish to add the widget to the dashboard. 8. Repeat steps 3-7 for each new widget you want to add to the dashboard. 216 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

217 Adding Widgets with Custom Charts and Tables You can add widgets that are based on the Custom Infrastructure report. For this type of widgets, you can choose to present virtual infrastructure data as an exploded pie, clustered column or stacked column. Before you add a widget to a dashboard, you must save the Custom Infrastructure report with the necessary parameters: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Open the Custom Infrastructure report and specify the necessary report parameters: data collection session, report scope, type of virtual infrastructure objects and object properties (columns) to be displayed in a widget. If required, define additional filtering and sorting settings. 3. Save the report. For details, see Saving Reports. Next, add to a dashboard a widget associated with the saved report: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Edit dashboard. 3. Click the plus icon in one of the dashboard cells to launch the Add widget wizard. 4. At the Widget pack step of the wizard, specify the widget name and choose the widget pack. a. In the Caption field, specify the widget name. The widget name will be displayed at the top of the widget on the dashboard. You can leave the field empty if you do not want to display the widget caption. a. Double-click Report based widgets or select the Report based widgets option and click Next. 217 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

218 4. At the Widget step of the wizard, choose the saved Custom Infrastructure report. Doubleclick the report or select the report and click Next. 5. At the Options step of the wizard, select how you want to present report data in the widget. To present data in a table, select Content table and click Finish. Veeam ONE Reporter will add a widget with a table to the dashboard. To present data in a chart, select Custom chart and click Next. 218 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

219 6. Select the type of a chart to display in the widget and click Next. 7. Select series fields, category fields and data fields to define what type of data will be presented in the chart and how this data will be grouped. You can only choose properties that you have previously added as columns in the Custom Infrastructure report. Series fields select what type of data will be plotted in the chart. The series field is a set of related data that is distinguished by a unique color and presented in the chart legend. Category fields select a criterion that will be used to group series fields. A category field is usually presented as a group of series fields on the horizontal axis. Data fields select what type of values will be be aggregated into a single slice, bar or a column in the chart and select the aggregate function. Every chart type requires a specific set of data for example, exploded pies are twodimension charts so you need to select only the series fields and data fields, while for clustered column charts, you need to select series fields, category fields and data fields. Basic 219 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

220 principles of working with custom charts and simple examples are described in Appendix C. Custom Charts for Report-Based Widgets. 8. Click Finish to add the widget to the dashboard. 9. Repeat steps 3-8 for each new widget you want to add to the dashboard. 220 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

221 Setting Dashboard Preview Image and Color After you have added a new dashboard, you can select the preview image that will be used to depict the dashboard in the Dashboards section. To set a preview image for the dashboard: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Set image. 3. From the list of predefined images, choose the image that you want to use to depict the dashboard. You can also select custom image preview image. To do so, click the empty image cell and select to the necessary graphic file. 4. Click OK. 221 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

222 You can change the background color of the dashboard preview image: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Select color. 3. From the dashboard color palette, choose the necessary background color. 4. Click OK. 222 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

223 Scheduling Dashboards You can schedule automatic dashboard delivery. You can choose to receive dashboards by , save dashboards to a folder on a hard drive or to a network share. To schedule automatic dashboard delivery: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the dashboard and click Scheduling dashboard. 3. In the Scheduling Administration window, click Add. 4. In the Scheduling window, configure your scheduling options. 5. In the Scheduling Dashboard Administration window, click Add. 6. In the Scheduling window, configure the scheduling options: a. Click Schedule on and specify a schedule according to which the dashboard must be generated and delivered. For details, see Specifying Delivery Schedule. b. Click Recipient and choose the method used to deliver the dashboard. You can choose to send the report by or save the report to a folder on a hard drive, or to a network share. For details, see Specifying Delivery Method. 7. [Optional] To temporarily disable a schedule, select the Disable scheduling for selected object check box. 8. Click Apply to save the specified settings. 9. [Optional] You can configure multiple schedules for the same dashboard. Repeat steps 5-8 for each new schedule you want to add. 10. Click Close. 223 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

224 Specifying Delivery Schedule To configure automatic dashboard delivery, you must specify the schedule according to which Veeam ONE Reporter must generate and deliver the dashboard. To configure the dashboard delivery schedule: 1. Choose the necessary dashboard and open the Scheduling window, as described in the Scheduling Dashboards procedure. 2. Click the link in the Schedule on section to define the schedule according to which the dashboard must be generated. To generate and deliver dashboards repeatedly, with a specific time interval, select the Periodically every hour(s) option and define the necessary interval. To generate and deliver dashboards at specific time, select the Daily at this time option, enter the time and weekdays on which the dashboards will be created. To generate and deliver dashboards on a monthly basis, select the Monthly option and choose the necessary months and dates or weekdays. 3. Click OK to apply the scheduling settings. Specifying Delivery Method To configure automatic dashboard delivery, you must specify the method that Veeam ONE Reporter must use to deliver the dashboard. You can choose to receive ready dashboards by , save dashboards to a folder on a hard drive or to a network share. To configure delivery of dashboards by 1. Choose the necessary dashboard and open the Scheduling window, as described in the Scheduling Dashboards procedure. 2. Click the link in the Recipient section. 3. Enter the recipient s address in the field To field. If you want to send generated dashboards to multiple recipients, separate addresses with a semicolon. 4. In the Subject field, enter the subject title. You can use the %DashboardName% variable in the subject line Veeam ONE Reporter will substitute this variable with the name of a corresponding dashboard. 224 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

225 5. In the Select the dashboard delivery format section, select the format for the delivered dashboard. You can choose to send the dashboard as an attached.png image or send the dashboard in the body. 6. Click OK to apply the delivery settings. Note: To be able to send dashboards by , make sure you specified SMTP settings in Veeam ONE Monitor. For details, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 1. Configure SMTP Server Settings. To configure automated dashboard delivery to a hard drive or a network share: 1. Choose the necessary dashboard and open the Scheduling window, as described in the Scheduling Dashboards procedure. 2. Click the link in the Recipient section. 3. In the Select Recipient window, click the Advanced button. 4. In the Path field, enter the path to a local folder or provide a network path. The address must lead to a folder that already exists. Veeam ONE Reporter will check if the specified folder exists and whether the folder is accessible to the Veeam ONE Reporter Server. If Veeam ONE Reporter detects any problems accessing the folder, a warning will be displayed next to the Path field. 5. If you want to run a custom script after the dashboard is delivered to the target folder, specify a path to the file with the script in the File Name field. Running a custom script allows you to perform further manipulations after the dashboard is are generated. You can find simple script examples in Appendix D. Scheduling Script Examples. Note: Make sure that the account under which the Veeam ONE Reporter Server service runs has appropriate write permissions for the destination folder. 6. Click OK to apply the delivery settings. 225 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

226 226 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

227 Managing Dashboard Schedules You can create multiple schedules for a dashboard. Maintaining multiple schedules allows you to set up complex scheduling and delivery method settings for the same dashboard. To manage dashboard schedules: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the dashboard and click Scheduling dashboard. 3. Use the buttons in the Scheduling Dashboard Administration window to manage the schedules that you have added for the dashboard: To create a new dashboard schedule, click Add. To edit scheduling settings, select a schedule in the list and click Edit. To delete a schedule from the list, select the schedule in the list and click Delete. To temporarily disable a schedule, select the schedule in the list and click Disable. To enable a previously disabled schedule, select the schedule in the list and click Enable. 4. To finish working with the schedules, click Close. 227 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

228 Viewing Scheduled Dashboard Delivery Results Every run of a dashboard scheduling job initiates a new delivery session. To view details on dashboard scheduling sessions: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Sessions in the Configuration section menu. 3. In the Job Type list, select Reporting. 4. Click the session in the list to display detailed information on it. 228 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

229 Publishing Dashboards To be able share a custom dashboard with other users, or integrate the dashboard to a web portal, you must publish this dashboard first. Veeam ONE users, including users who have permissions assigned on a limited scope of the virtual infrastructure, can access published custom dashboards by direct dashboard URLs. To publish a custom dashboard: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Publish. 3. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box to confirm publishing. After you publish the dashboard, you can generate its direct URL to share it with other users or integrate it in a web portal. For details, see Generating Direct Dashboard URL. You can also send the link to the dashboard to other users by . For details, see Sharing Dashboards. To make a published custom dashboard inaccessible, you can unpublish it: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Unpublish. 3. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box to remove the dashboard from public access. Note: You can publish and unpublish only custom-designed dashboards. Predefined dashboards are available for public access by default. 229 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

230 Generating Direct Dashboard URL To share a dashboard with other users, or integrate the dashboard to a web portal, you can generate a direct dashboard URL. Note: Before you generate and share an URL for a custom dashboard, you must publish this dashboard first. For details, see Publishing Dashboards. To generate a direct dashboard URL: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Dashboard URL. 3. Copy the URL and use it to share with other users or integrate to web portals. 230 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

231 Sharing Dashboards To share a dashboard with other users, you can send a direct dashboard URL by . To set dashboard permissions: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Share dashboard. 3. In the Dashboard Sharing window, select the user or a group of users with whom you want to share the dashboard. By default, this list includes members of the Veeam ONE Administrators group. Note: Veeam ONE service retrieves the list of users and user groups with which you can share dashboards from the Active Directory. To be able to grant dashboard permissions to a user or user group in a domain, make sure that Veeam ONE service account is a member of a corresponding AD domain. 4. To send a direct dashboard URL by , click the envelope icon next to the user or group, specify user's address and click Send. If you want to send the dashboard URL to multiple recipients, separate addresses with a semicolon. 231 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

232 Modifying Dashboards You can modify the name, description, layout and widgets for custom-designed dashboards. Changing Dashboard Name, Description and Layout To modify the name, description or layout of a custom dashboard: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Edit layout. 3. In the Edit dashboard window, change the dashboard name, description and the layout of dashboard widgets. 4. Click OK to save changes. Changing Dashboard Widgets To modify widgets of a custom dashboard: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Edit dashboard. 3. Change properties of the dashboard widgets. For details, see Managing Widgets. 4. Change the arrangement of widgets by dragging them to the necessary dashboard cells. 232 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

233 Deleting Dashboards You can delete a custom-designed dashboards if you no longer need it: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the dashboard you want to delete and click Delete. 3. Click Yes in the displayed window to confirm deletion. 233 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

234 Managing Widgets You can edit settings of dashboard widgets, share widgets with other users and remove widgets from dashboards. Changing Widget Properties You can change the way your widgets look on custom dashboards: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Edit dashboard. 3. On the dashboard, select the widget you want to modify. 4. Open the menu at the top right corner of the widget and click Edit Widget. 5. In the Add Widget wizard, change the widget settings. For details on specifying widget settings, see Creating Dashboards. Sharing Dashboard Widgets To share a widget with other users, or integrate the widget to a web portal, you can generate a direct widget URL. To share a dashboard widget: 1. Open the Dashboards view. 2. Select the necessary dashboard and do one of the following: Click the dashboard to open it. Open the menu at the top right corner of the dashboard and click Edit dashboard. 3. On the dashboard, select the widget you want to share. Open the menu at the top right corner of the widget and click Get widget URL. 4. Copy the URL and use it to share with other users or integrate to web portals. Creating a Widget Report You can create reports associated with dashboard widgets: 1. Open the Dashboards view. 2. Select the necessary dashboard and do one of the following: Click the dashboard to open it. Open the menu at the top right corner of the dashboard and click Edit dashboard. 3. Open the necessary dashboard and select the widget for which you want to create a report. Open the menu at the top right corner of the widget and click View Full Report. 234 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

235 4. In the Drill Down Report window, specify report parameters. Click Create report in the Actions pane. Deleting Widgets To delete a widget from a custom dashboard: 1. Open the Dashboards section. 2. Open the menu at the top right corner of the necessary dashboard and click Edit dashboard. 3. On the dashboard, select the widget you want to delete. Open the menu at the top right corner of the widget and click Delete Widget. 4. In the displayed window, click OK to confirm deletion. 235 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

236 Reports Out of the box, Veeam ONE Reporter comes with a set of ready-to-use reports designed to help you track typical performance and health state issues. To access reports, open the Workspace tab of Veeam ONE Reporter console. In the Workspace section, you can generate and manage various types of reports and save reports with custom parameters. The left pane of the Workspace section contains a hierarchy of folders containing reports. The mid part of the Workspace section displays the list of reports in the selected folder. To quickly find reports, you can use the following controls at the top of the list: Use the search field to quickly find reports by report name. Choose the necessary predefined filter to show reports included in the same logical group you can filter audit, backup, backup jobs, cluster, configuration, datastore, forecasting, host, performance, permissions, raw data, service providers, tape reports, as well as search through recently used reports. The search field and predefined filters allow you to find reports only within the scope of the report folder that is selected in the hierarchy on the left. Note: Before you start working with reports, make sure that data about your Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure and virtual environment has been successfully collected at least once. For information on configuring and running data collection, see section Servers. 236 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

237 Viewing Reports To create a report with Veeam ONE Reporter: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder in the hierarchy on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click the necessary report. 4. Specify the report parameters, such as the report scope, reporting period and so on. 5. Click the Preview button at the bottom of the report parameters. Alternatively, you can click the Preview link in the Actions pane on the right. Veeam ONE Reporter will open the created report in a pop-up browser window. Note: Make sure that pop-up windows are allowed from the Veeam ONE Reporter website. Otherwise, generated reports will be blocked. 237 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

238 Veeam ONE reports vary depending on the type and input parameters. They can be relatively short or span to several pages. Report data can be presented as graphs, charts, tables or text entries. The navigation menu at the top of each generated report allows you to manipulate the report as follows: Left/right arrow buttons switch between the report pages. Fast forward/fast backward buttons go to the last/first page of the report. Search box search for specific text within the report. Go to page field enter the necessary page number and press Enter on your keyboard to go to a specific page of the report. Back button return to the parent report from a drill-down report. Export menu (diskette icon) save your report in one of the following file formats: Excel, Word or PDF. If Veeam ONE Reporter is integrated with the Microsoft SQL Reporting Services server, additional report formats are available. You can later view your saved reports on another computer or share them with your colleagues or stakeholders. Refresh button update the report contents with the latest collected data. 238 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

239 Viewing Offline Reports In addition to regular reports that open in a web browser and can be automatically delivered, Veeam ONE offers a number of offline reports that can be generated and viewed later with the use of proprietary Veeam Report Viewer software. This is convenient way to view key infrastructure information off-site in a disconnected mode, outside the current infrastructure or its networks. Offline reports are grouped in the Offline reports folder. You can reach them like the other reports. The process of offline report compilation is similar to creating regular reports, but differs in a way offline reports are viewed. To view offline reports, Veeam Report Viewer software is required. To download Veeam Report Viewer: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Choose a report in the Offline reports folder. 3. Click the Download Veeam Report Viewer link in the Actions pane. 4. After downloading the installer file, follow the steps of the installation wizard to install Veeam Report Viewer. Tip: If you have previously used Veeam Report Viewer software, you must upgrade it to the the latest available version. To access and view offline reports: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary report in the Offline reports folder. 3. Specify the report parameters. 4. Click Preview to generate a report file. Veeam ONE Reporter will generate a file with the.vmr extension and save it to the download location. 5. Open the downloaded file with Veeam Report Viewer. Veeam Report Viewer will process data contained in the.vmr report and prepare the output. The output may contain data viewable in Microsoft Office suite applications: Excel and Visio. Please ensure that you have appropriate software to open such files. 239 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

240 Saving Reports You can create reports with custom parameters and save them for future access: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder in the hierarchy on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click the necessary report. 4. Specify the report parameters, such as the report scope, reporting period and so on. 5. Click the Save as button at the bottom of the report parameters. Alternatively, you can click the Save as link in the Actions pane on the right. 6. In the Save Report window, specify the report name and description and select a folder to which you want to place the report. Note: You can only select the My reports folder or another folder that you have previously created. You cannot save reports to predefined Veeam ONE Reporter folders. For details on working with folders, see Organizing Reports. 7. Select the Open the report in the specified folder check box if you want to open the report after saving. 8. Click OK. 240 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

241 Modifying Reports You can modify the name, description and parameters for reports that you have previously saved to My reports. Renaming Reports To modify the name of a saved report: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report whose name you want to modify. 4. Click Rename in the Actions pane on the right. 5. In the Name field, specify a new report name. 6. Click OK. Modifying Report Description To modify the description of a saved report: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report whose description you want to modify. 4. Click Edit description in the Actions pane on the right. 5. In the Description field, specify a new report description. 6. Click OK. Changing Report Parameters To change parameters of a saved report: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report whose parameters you want to modify. 4. Click Edit in the Actions pane on the right. 5. Change the report parameters as required. 6. Click the Save in the Actions pane on the right. Important! After you edit a report, dashboard widgets based on this report may become invalid. If you have previously added widgets that are associated with the modified report, check the widgets and recreate them if necessary. 241 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

242 Organizing Reports You can organize your reports with the help of report folders. Similar to file system folders, Veeam ONE Reporter folders are used to group reports in a convenient way. In addition to simply grouping reports, folders allow you to perform operations over a group of reports at once. For example, if you want to schedule an automatic report delivery for a number of reports, you can place the necessary reports to the same folder and then specify a schedule for the whole folder. Custom folders can be added as child folders under My reports. Such folders are displayed in the left pane of the Workspace view, along with the predefined folders. Note: All operations described in this section can be applied to custom folders only. You cannot modify or delete predefined Veeam ONE Reporter folders. Creating Folders To create a new folder: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. In the hierarchy on the left, select the My reports folder. You can also choose any folder that you have previously created under the My reports node. 3. Click New folder at the top of the report list. 4. In the Create Folder window, enter the name of a new folder and click Create. The new folder will be added to the My Reports hierarchy. 242 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

243 Renaming Folders To change a folder name, follow the next steps: 1. Open the Workspace view. 2. In the My reports hierarchy on the left, select the folder you want to rename. 3. Click Rename folder at the top of the report list. 4. In the Rename Folder window, enter the name of a new folder and click Rename. Deleting Folders If you no longer need a folder, you can delete it while still retaining its contents (reports and subfolders): 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. In the My reports hierarchy on the left, select the folder you want to delete. 3. Click Delete folder at the top of the report list. 4. If the folder you are trying to delete contains reports or subfolders, you may choose to move the folder contents to another folder. To do so, select the Move existing reports to selected folder check box, choose the new destination folder from the list and click OK. If you leave the check box cleared, the folder will be deleted along with its contents. 243 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

244 Moving Reports You can move saved reports from one folder to another folder in My Reports. To move a saved report: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report whose name you want to move. 4. Click Move in the Actions pane on the right. 5. In the Put in folder list, choose the new target folder for the report. 6. Click OK. 244 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

245 Scheduling Reports You can schedule automatic report delivery for one report or for a number of reports included in a report folder. You can choose to receive ready reports by , save reports to a folder on a hard drive or to a network share. Note that you can only schedule delivery for saved reports (that is, reports in the My Reports folder and its subfolders). To schedule automatic report delivery: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report for which you want to set scheduled delivery. 4. Click Scheduling in the Actions pane on the right. 5. In the Scheduling Report Administration window, click Add. 6. In the Scheduling window, configure the scheduling options: a. Click Schedule on and specify a schedule according to which the report must be generated and delivered. For details, see Specifying Delivery Schedule. b. Click Recipient and choose the method used to deliver the report. You can choose to send the report by or save the report to a folder on a hard drive, or to a network share. For details, see Specifying Delivery Method. c. In the Format list, choose the format in which the report must be saved. 7. [Optional] To temporarily disable a schedule, select the Disable scheduling for selected object check box. 8. Click Apply to save the specified settings. 9. [Optional] You can configure multiple schedules for the same report. Repeat steps 5-8 for each new schedule you want to add. 10. Click Close. 245 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

246 Specifying Delivery Schedule To configure automatic report delivery, you must specify the schedule according to which Veeam ONE Reporter must generate and deliver the report. To configure the report delivery schedule: 1. Choose the necessary report and open the Scheduling window, as described in the Scheduling Reports procedure. 2. Click the link in the Schedule on section to define the schedule according to which the report must be generated. To generate and deliver reports repeatedly, with a specific time interval, select the Periodically every hour(s) option and define the necessary interval. To generate and deliver reports at specific time, select the Daily at this time option, enter the time and weekdays on which the reports will be created. To generate and deliver reports on a monthly basis, select the Monthly option and choose the necessary months and dates or weekdays. 3. Click OK to apply the scheduling settings. Specifying Delivery Method To configure automatic report delivery, you must specify the method that Veeam ONE Reporter must use to deliver the report. You can choose to receive ready reports by , save reports to a folder on a hard drive or to a network share. To configure delivery of dashboards by 1. Choose the necessary report and open the Scheduling window, as described in the Scheduling Reports procedure. 2. Click the link in the Recipient section to define how the report must be delivered. 3. In the To field, enter recipient s address. If you want to send generated reports to multiple recipients, separate addresses with a semicolon. 4. In the Subject field, enter the subject title. 246 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

247 You can use the %ReportName% variable in the subject line Veeam ONE Reporter will substitute this variable with the name of a corresponding report. 5. Click OK to apply the delivery method settings. Note: To be able to send reports by , make sure you specified SMTP settings in Veeam ONE Monitor. For details, see Configuring Notification Settings > Step 1. Configure SMTP Server Settings. To configure automated delivery of reports to a hard drive or a network share: 1. Choose the necessary report and open the Scheduling window, as described in the Scheduling Reports procedure. 2. Click the link in the Recipient section to define how the report must be delivered. 3. In the Select Recipient window, click the Advanced button. 4. In the Path field, specify the path to a local folder or provide a network path. The address must lead to a folder that already exists. Veeam ONE Reporter will check if the specified folder exists and whether the folder is accessible by the Veeam ONE Reporter Server. If Veeam ONE Reporter detects any problems accessing the folder, a warning will be displayed next to the Path field. Note: Make sure that the account under which the Veeam ONE Reporter Server service runs has appropriate write permissions for the destination folder. 5. To run a custom script after reports are delivered to the target folder, specify a path to the file with the script in the File Name field. Running a custom script allows you to perform further manipulations after reports are generated. You can find simple script examples in Appendix D. Scheduling Script Examples. 6. Click OK to apply the delivery method settings. 247 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

248 248 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

249 Scheduling Delivery for Multiple Reports Instead of to scheduling automatic report delivery for separate reports, you can set the schedule for a number of reports that are included into the same folder. To create a schedule for reports located in the same folder: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. In the My reports hierarchy on the left, select a folder for which you want to set scheduled delivery. 3. Click Schedule folder at the top of the report list. 4. Configure the schedule and delivery method as described in section Scheduling Reports. 5. [Optional] To temporarily disable a schedule, select the Disable scheduling for selected object check box. 7. Click Apply to save the specified settings. 8. Click Close. 249 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

250 Managing Report Schedules You can create multiple schedules for a report or a report folder. Maintaining multiple schedules allows you to set up complex scheduling and delivery method settings for the same report or folder. To manage report or folder schedules: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My reports on the left, or click a saved report in the displayed list of reports. 3. Click Scheduling in the Actions pane on the right. 4. Use the buttons in the Scheduling Report/Folder Administration window to manage the schedules that you have added for the report or folder: To create a new schedule, click Add. To edit scheduling settings, select a schedule in the list and click Edit. To delete a schedule from the list, select the schedule in the list and click Delete. To temporarily disable a schedule, select the schedule in the list and click Disable. To enable a previously disabled schedule, select the schedule in the list and click Enable. 4. To finish working with the schedules, click Close. 250 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

251 Viewing Scheduled Report Delivery Results Every run of a report scheduling job initiates a new scheduling session. To view details on report scheduling sessions: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Sessions in the Configuration section menu. 3. In the Job Type list, select Reporting. 4. Click the session in the list to display detailed information on it. 251 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

252 Copying Reports You can create copies of reports that you have previously saved to My Reports. Copying may save time if you need to create multiple instances of the same report. For example, you have configured a report with complex parameters and need create a set of similar reports with slightly different parameters. In this situation, you can create several copies of the saved report and change report parameters for each report copy. To create a report copy: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My Reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report that you want to copy. 4. Click Copy in the Actions pane on the right. 5. In the Copy Report section, specify the name of the report, its description and select a folder to which the report copy should be saved. You can only choose a folder in the My reports hierarchy. 6. Select the Open this report in the specified folder check box if you want to open the report after copying. Use this option if you need to customize the report parameters after copying. 7. Click OK. After you create a report copy, modify the report parameters as described in Modifying Reports. 252 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

253 Deleting Reports If you no longer need a report, you can delete it. You can only delete reports that you have previously saved to My Reports. To delete a report: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My Reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report that you want to delete. 4. Click Delete in the Actions pane on the right. 5. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to confirm report deletion. Important! After you delete a report, all dashboard widgets based on this report will become invalid. Publishing Reports To be able share a saved report with other users, or integrate the report to a web portal, you must publish the report. Veeam ONE users, including users who have permissions assigned on a limited scope of the virtual infrastructure, can access published reports by direct report URLs. To publish a report: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My Reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report that you want to publish. 4. Click Publish in the Actions pane on the right. After you publish the report, generate its direct URL to share it with other users or integrate it in a web portal. For detail, see Generating Direct Report URL. To make a published report inaccessible, you can unpublish it: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the necessary folder under My Reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report that you want to publish. 4. Click Unpublish in the Actions pane on the right. 253 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

254 Generating Direct Report URL To share a report with other users, or integrate the report to a web portal, you can generate a direct report URL. Before you generate a direct report URL and share it with other users, check that: You have saved the report to My Reports You have published the report To generate a report URL: 1. Open the Workspace view. 2. Select the necessary folder under My Reports on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click a saved report for which you want to generate URL. 4. Click the Report URL command in the Actions pane on the right. 5. Copy the URL and use it to share with other users or integrate to web portals. 254 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

255 Deployment Projects Veeam ONE deployment projects allow you to predict future resource utilization and plan resource reservations in your virtual environment. With deployment projects, you can run complex simulation tasks to predict the effects of: Adding or evicting hosts in a cluster Adding new VMs or decommissioning existing VMs Deployment projects compare the projected resource capacities against the future resource demand, help identify potential resource shortages and provide practical recommendations that an administrator should undertake to succeed with the actual deployment. For example, you can simulate how many VMs similar to an existing SQL Server can be added in a cluster without the risk of causing resource contention or degraded cluster performance. Deployment projects can be helpful in assessing various hardware replacement scenarios or forecasting the amount of compute and storage resources that need to be provisioned. Deployment Projects and Scenarios Each deployment project includes a specific simulation scenario. A simulation scenario describes what amount of resources must be added to or evicted from the managed environment. In simulation scenarios, you can: Select an existing host or a VM and use it as a baseline model to calculate the effects of adding or evicting resources Explicitly specify host or VM configuration Simulation scenarios can be targeted at a host or cluster, termed container a recipient node that will undergo the capacity changes and whose future performance and resource utilization will be assessed. Condition for Acceptance The deployment project is considered successful if future resource utilization and performance metrics do not breach the designated thresholds that define the maximum tolerable resource load. The thresholds are preset and can be customized if necessary. Tentatively successful projects (projects completed with warnings) will cause the metrics to breach the thresholds but stay beyond 100 percent of resource utilization (for example, memory usage exceeding a 90 percent threshold but being less than 100 percent). Calculation Background Resource availability and performance modelling is based on comparing future demand for resources against the projected resource capacity. The following factors are used in the analysis: Current compute capacities Additional capacities introduced through adding new host(s) or evicting VM(s) Withdrawn compute capacities through evicting host(s) Extra capacities required to run new VM(s) The following algorithms are employed to forecast workloads: When a new VM is added, it is assumed that the VM will use all its provisioned resources. When an existing VM is selected as a baseline model, Veeam ONE will use the average value of the VM resource consumption during the current week. When calculating the amount of free space, Veeam ONE verifies that there is sufficient storage capacity for all virtual disks of the VM. 255 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

256 Deployment Project Interdependencies You can create several simulation scenarios that describe complex conditions, such as introducing new/decommissioning existing hosts or VMs in the same container, at the same time. You can also create deployment scenarios with overlapping due dates. When you create a new deployment project or make changes in the existing deployment project, Veeam ONE checks is there exists any overlapping project. If there are changes that might affect the concurrent project, Veeam ONE will prompt you to recalculate the overlapping projects. Limitations Deployment Projects are not supported in Veeam ONE deployments that use Microsoft SQL Server 2005 to host the Veeam ONE database. In such configurations, the All deployment projects menu will not be accessible in the Workspace section of Veeam ONE Reporter. 256 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

257 Getting Started with Deployment Projects A typical workflow for creating a deployment project includes the following steps: 1. Create a new deployment project, specify its settings and add simulation scenarios. 2. Check the effective thresholds and modify their values if necessary. 3. Build the deployment project to run a simulation. 4. Create a report to examine results. 5. Complete the project after the actual resources have been added or evicted. Creating Deployment Projects To create a new deployment project: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Click the Add button. 4. In the Name field, enter a name of the project. 5. In the Creator field, specify the name of a project creator. By default, this field is populated with the name of the user who is currently logged in to Veeam ONE Reporter. 6. Click the Container link and select a standalone host to which you want to add hosts or VMs, or from which you want to remove hosts or VMs. 7. [Optional] Click the Datastore link and select one or more datastores to which VMs will be placed. Select datastores if you need to calculate storage resource requirements for new VMs. The datastore selection scope includes all datastores accessible by the selected container. 8. Click Edit next to the Scenario field and add one or more simulation scenarios. For details, see Defining Project Scenarios. 9. In the Deployment Date field, specify the date when the deployment project must be completed. 10. Click OK. 257 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

258 Defining Project Scenarios A deployment project scenario describes configuration of the hosts or VMs that must be added or evicted from the target container. One scenario can combine conditions for adding and evicting both hosts and VMs. This section describes procedures for adding and evicting VMs, as well as adding and evicting hosts. Adding VMs To simulate a situation of adding new VMs to a host or cluster: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Open the necessary deployment project. 4. Click the Edit button next to the Scenario field. 5. In the Edit Scenario window, click Add to launch the Add or remove item wizard. 6. At the Item step of the wizard, select Virtual Machine. 7. At the Configuration step of the wizard, describe VM configuration: To explicitly specify configuration values, select the VM Configuration option and type the VM name, the number of CPU cores and CPU clock speed, the amount of memory resources, the amount of space allocated for a virtual disk and the number of disks. To choose an existing VM that will be used as a template in the scenario, select the Existing VM option and choose a VM from the list. The VM selection scope includes all VMs in the selected container. 8. Click Finish to complete the wizard. 258 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

259 9. In the Edit scenario window, select the scenario entry, click the Count field and specify the number of VMs to be added. 10. Click OK. Evicting VMs To simulate a situation of evicting a VM from a host or cluster: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Open the necessary deployment project. 4. Click the Edit button next to the Scenario field. 5. In the Edit Scenario window, click Evict to launch the Add or remove item wizard. 6. At the Item step of the wizard, select Virtual Machine. 7. At the Configuration step of the wizard, click the link next to the Existing VM option and choose a VM from the list. The VM selection scope includes all VMs in the selected container. 8. Click Finish to complete the wizard. 9. In the Edit scenario window, click OK. Adding Hosts To simulate a situation of adding new hosts to a cluster: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Open the necessary deployment project. 4. Click the Edit button next to the Scenario field. 5. In the Edit Scenario window, click Add to launch the Add or remove item wizard. 6. At the Item step of the wizard, select Host. 7. At the Configuration step of the wizard, describe host configuration: To explicitly specify configuration values, select the Host Configuration option and type the host name, the number of CPU cores and CPU clock speed and the amount of memory resources. To choose an existing host that will be used as a template in the scenario, select the Existing Host option and choose a host from the list. The host selection scope includes all hosts in the selected cluster. 259 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

260 8. Click Finish to complete the wizard. 9. In the Edit scenario window, select the scenario entry, click the Count field and specify the number of hosts to be added. 10. Click OK. Evicting Hosts To simulate a situation of evicting a host from a cluster: 1. Open the Workspace setion. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Open the necessary deployment project. 4. Click the Edit button next to the Scenario field. 5. In the Edit Scenario window, click Evict to launch the Add or remove item wizard. 6. At the Item step of the wizard, select Host. 7. At the Configuration step of the wizard, click the link next to the Existing Host option and choose a host from the list. The host selection scope includes all hosts in the selected container. 8. Click Finish to complete the wizard. 9. In the Edit scenario window, click OK. 260 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

261 Modifying Scenario Parameters You can change parameters of a deployment scenario: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Select the necessary deployment project in the list and click Edit. 4. Click the Edit button next to the Scenario field. 5. In the Edit Scenario window, you can perform the following modifications: 6. Click OK. Click Add to add a new host or VM to the selected container. Click Evict to evict an existing host or VM from the selected container. Click View to view configuration details for the selected scenario entry. Click Remove from scenario to remove the selected scenario entry. Click Clear all to remove all entries from the scenario. In the Count field, change the number of host or VMs to add to the selected container. 261 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

262 Building Deployment Projects After you create a deployment project, you need to build it to run the scenario modeling and make sure that your capacities meet the deployment conditions. You must also re-built (recalculate) a deployment project when its settings change, or when the project is affected by changes in concurrent projects. To run a simulation: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Select the necessary deployment project in the list and click Build. Veeam ONE will build the project and display the project result in the State field. For explanation of deployment project states, see Deployment Project States. 262 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

263 Viewing Deployment Project Report After you have built a project, you can view a report detailing the outcome of the simulated deployment: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Select the necessary deployment project in the list and click View report. The report is designed to assist an administrator in implementing the deployment. The report details a projected resource usage, identifies a list of constraints and provides mitigation guidance. The first report page outlines the projected changes and gives a summary of the constraining resources. 263 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

264 The subsequent pages show anticipated CPU, memory and storage usage levels and provide recommendations on capacity planning measures for maintaining robust and consistent performance in future. 264 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

265 Completing Deployment Projects After you have run a simulation based on a deployment project, you can flag the project as Completed. By completing a deployment project, you instruct Veeam ONE to assume that all resources tied up to the project can be released and made available for calculation of the concurrent projects. To complete a deployment project: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Select the necessary deployment project in the list and click Complete. 4. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box to confirm project completion. After you complete a project, its state will be changed to Completed, and the project deployment date will be set to the current date. Modifying Deployment Projects You can modify settings of a deployment project that you have not completed yet. For example, you may need to update deployment project settings if the project was built with the Failed sate. To modify deployment project settings: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Select the necessary deployment project in the list and click Edit. 4. Change the deployment project settings as described in Creating Deployment Projects. 5. Save changes. After you change project settings, you need to build the project anew. You might also need to rebuild overlapping or dependent projects. For example, if you change the project due date to an earlier date, Veeam ONE will offer you to rebuild all projects whose dates overlap with the changed project. Deleting Deployment Projects If you no longer need a deployment project, you can delete it: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Select the necessary deployment project in the list and click Delete. 4. Click Yes in the displayed dialog box to confirm project deletion. After you delete a deployment project, you might need to rebuild overlapping or dependent projects. 265 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

266 Adjusting Performance Thresholds Before you run a scenario simulation, you might need to examine the effective performance thresholds and change them if necessary. The thresholds describe the maximum allowable resource utilization level that must not be exceeded after the deployment project changes come into effect. The default performance thresholds are designed to ensure conservative resource utilization and are therefore appropriate for the majority of typical capacity planning projects. To view and change performance thresholds: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the All deployment projects menu. 3. Click Thresholds. 4. Change threshold values if required: 5. Click OK. CPU max load maximum allowable processor utilization level on a physical host. vcpu per core maximum allowable CPU allocation ratio (the ratio of vcpu to pcpu). It is calculated as the total number of allocated virtual cores divided by the number of physical cores in the target container. Memory max load maximum allowable memory utilization level on the physical host. Storage max load maximum allowable amount of used space on the target datastores. 266 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

267 Deployment Project States Veeam ONE Deployment projects may have one of the following states. Needs to be calculated The state indicates that project calculation is pending. Remediation action is to build the project. For details, see Building Deployment Projects. Needs to be recalculated The state is assigned if the project settings have changed, or changes in a concurrent project affect the project. Remediation action is to build the project. For details, see Building Deployment Projects. Failed The state indicates that the project simulation has completed but the deployment cannot be executed successfully due to anticipated resource constraints. The deployment simulation analysis has concluded that it is impossible to place the desired number of hosts and/or VMs without causing the future resource utilization to exceed 100 percent on any of the performance metrics. Remediation action is to change view the project report and change the project settings in accordance with the report recommendations. For details, see Viewing Deployment Project Report and Modifying Deployment Projects. Passed with Warnings This state indicates that the deployment is feasible but will cause the resource utilization to breach the threshold values. However, the threshold values will not reach 100 percent. Remediation action is to change view the project report and change the project settings in accordance with the report recommendations. For details, see Viewing Deployment Project Report and Modifying Deployment Projects. Passed The state means that the project has completed successfully and its requirements are fully met. There are enough resources to accomplish the planned deployment and maintain an acceptable level of resource utilization. 267 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

268 Business View Reporting Veeam ONE Reporter integrates with Veeam ONE Business View and allows you to create reports and dashboards for business view groups. For example, if you group VMs by department, you can create reports for a specific department in your organization. After you categorize virtual infrastructure objects in Veeam ONE Business View, you must run data collection in Veeam ONE Reporter. Once data is collected, you will be able to select business view groups as the scope of reports and dashboards. The following example shows how you can create the Protected VMs report for specific business view groups: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select the Veeam Backup & Replication folder in the hierarchy on the left. 3. In the displayed list of reports, click the Protected VMs report. 4. From the Business view objects list, select business groups for which you want to create a report. 5. Specify other report parameters and click Preview. 268 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

269 Veeam ONE Reporter will present data from the business point of view that is, for the selected business groups. 269 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

270 VEEAM ONE BUSINESS VIEW Veeam ONE Business View a part of an integrated Veeam ONE solution allows you to categorize your virtual environment and display the virtual infrastructure topology from the business standpoint. With Veeam ONE Business View, you can gain business insight across numerous vcenter Servers and ESX(i) hosts in the virtual environment. While VMware vsphere Client offers a set of views presenting virtual infrastructure hierarchy from a technical perspective (VMs and templates, datastores, networks and so on), Veeam ONE Business View builds a different categorization model it presents data about VMs, hosts, storages and clusters in business terms, as they are categorized in your virtual infrastructure. Such insight from the enterprise perspective allows you to control, analyze and plan constantly developing and changing virtual environment. This chapter covers functionality available in Veeam ONE Business View, provides guidelines for its initial configuration and describes possibilities for categorizing infrastructure objects in you VMware vsphere, vcloud Director environment from the business perspectives. 270 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

271 About Veeam ONE Business View Veeam ONE Business View allows you to represent your virtual infrastructure inventory from the organizational point of view and in terms that make sense to your business. In this section, you will learn about Veeam ONE Business View basic concepts, operation principles. Categorization Model To build up a logical business representation of the virtual infrastructure, Veeam ONE Business View uses categories of clusters, hosts, VMs and storage objects that act as basic units for data analysis. With the help of categories, Veeam ONE Business View represents the virtual infrastructure from business perspectives. This section describes Veeam ONE Business View basic concepts and categorization model. Categories and Groups To present the virtual infrastructure from the business standpoint, Veeam ONE Business View uses concepts of categories and groups. Category is a logical business division or a sector of the virtual infrastructure. Every category includes a number of groups. Group is a collection of virtual infrastructure objects that have the same characteristics, or match the same criteria from the business perspective. You can use the following types of virtual infrastructure objects as categorization elements: Virtual machines Hosts Clusters Storage objects For example, you can create the following business categories Department, Purpose, SLA. In the Department category, you can have the following groups: Sales, Customer Service, Marketing, Development and others. The Sales group within the Department category can include all VMs that belong to the Sales department in your company. In a similar manner, the Production group within the Purpose category can include VMs, hosts, storages and clusters used for production purposes. You can add the same virtual infrastructure object to groups in different categories. For example, the same VM can belong to the SQL Servers group in the Purpose category and be a part of the Sales group in the Department category. Static and Dynamic Groups You can create static or dynamic groups within categories: Static groups are populated manually. To add a VM, host, storage object or cluster into a static group, you must explicitly assign a group tag to it. To automate population of static groups, you can use categorization rules. For details, see Categorization Rules. Dynamic groups are populated automatically. To add objects to dynamic groups, you need to specify a certain condition. Veeam ONE Business View will create dynamic groups based on the specified condition, and will automatically include virtual infrastructure objects into these groups. For example, you can specify an expression to divide hosts into two groups by the CPU speed Above 1 GHz and Below 1 GHz. Veeam ONE Business View will automatically create the groups and distribute 271 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

272 hosts among them. To learn more about working with dynamic groups, see Adding Dynamic Groups and Appendix E. Grouping Expression Syntax and Examples. Categorization Rules Instead of adding virtual infrastructure objects to static groups manually, you can create categorization rules and assign them to static groups. A categorization rule presents a condition with which virtual infrastructure objects comply or do not comply. Categorization rules can be used to group and filter out objects based on the following criteria: Object name Infrastructure location Object properties For example, you can create a categorization rule that will place all VMs that have 'market' as part of their name to the Marketing group of the Department category. Or you can create a categorization rule that will place all objects in the Production resource pool to the Production group of the Purpose category. Categorization rules work in the real-time mode: as soon as a categorization rule is created, it is immediately applied to categorize discovered objects in the virtual environment. The rule can prescribe to include all matching virtual infrastructure objects to a corresponding static group automatically. You can also configure the rule to mark the objects as awaiting categorization approval. In this case, the matching objects are not included in groups automatically. Instead, objects are placed to a specific Require Approval group. To move objects from the Require Approval group to the target static group, the administrator must confirm categorization. You can use categorization rules inversely. If you want to exclude a group of objects from business categorization, you can create an exclusive rule. An exclusive rule cannot assign category values to matching objects. Vice versa, this rule is used to exclude objects from existing groups. Note: Categorization rules can be used for grouping VMs, hosts and storage objects, while clusters can only be categorized manually. Categorization Data In Veeam ONE Business View, you can work with both vcenter Servers or standalone ESX(i) hosts. If standalone hosts are connected to Veeam ONE, it collects data from the hosts to create an inventory of the host child objects VMs and datastores. The collected data is stored to the Veeam ONE database and is used for categorizing VMs and datastores. If a vcenter Server is connected to Veeam ONE, it collects data about virtual infrastructure objects to create an inventory of your virtual environment. At the same time, it collects custom details: From vcenter Server 5.1 and earlier custom attributes and attribute values assigned to VMs and hosts From vcenter Server 5.5 and later tags and tag values assigned to clusters, hosts, VMs and datastores The collected data is stored to the Veeam ONE database. Veeam ONE Business View uses collected custom attributes and custom attribute values, tags and tag values to configure the initial categorization scheme for your virtual environment. If you already use some vcenter Server custom attributes or tags to categorize your virtual environment, you can map these attributes or tags to Veeam ONE Business View categories. Values of these mapped custom attributes or tags can be adjusted and used as groups of corresponding categories. For details, see Mapping Custom Attributes to Business View Categories. 272 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

273 You can synchronize categorization data stored in the Veeam ONE database with custom attributes or tags on the vcenter Server side. To do so, you need to change Veeam ONE Business View configuration options to enable updates of custom attributes or tags. If updates of custom attributes or tags is enabled, every time when a data collection is performed, Veeam ONE will not only gather data from the vcenter Server, but will also write category values from the Veeam ONE database to the vcenter Server. For example, if you group VMs by departments in Veeam ONE Business View, group values for VMs will be stored both in Veeam ONE database and will be also available as VM custom attributes or tags on the vcenter Server side. This categorization data stored in vcenter custom attributes or tags can be accessed and used in any 3-rd party applications or scripts. To learn how to enable updates of attributes or tags, see Configuring Options. If you do not want to write categorization information to custom attributes or tags, you should leave updates of custom attributes or tags disabled. In this case, categorization information will be stored in the Veeam ONE database only; vcenter Server custom attributes or tags will not be affected in any way. Categorization Objects As basic objects for categorization, Veeam ONE Business View uses virtual infrastructure objects VMs, hosts, storage objects and clusters. The following table summarizes limitations specific for every object. Object/Limitation VM Host Storage Cluster Can be included to static groups manually Can be included to static groups with categorization rules Can be included to dynamic groups Can store categorization data in vcenter Server custom attributes Can store categorization data in vcenter Server tags Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes 273 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

274 Business View Integration Veeam ONE Business View is primarily designed for integration with applications that allow virtual infrastructure management. Coming as an integral part of the Veeam ONE solution, Business View allows Veeam ONE Monitor and Veeam ONE Reporter to take advantage of business categorization. Both Veeam ONE Monitor and Veeam ONE Reporter use categorization data of Veeam ONE Business View to build a business hierarchy of objects in the managed environment. This allows you to extend virtual infrastructure management from technical terms (hosts, resource pools, clusters and so on) to any categorization model you may require. In Veeam ONE Reporter, you can generate reports and build dashboards for Business View groups of VMs, hosts, clusters and storage objects. In Veeam ONE Monitor, you can monitor Business View groups of VMs, hosts, clusters and storage objects. You can track the health state of your virtual infrastructure presented from the business perspective (that is, based on your company needs and priorities). For detailed information monitoring and reporting capabilities for Veeam ONE Business View groups, see sections Monitoring Business View Groups and Business View Reporting. Data Collection To retrieve virtual infrastructure data necessary for building up the business topology, you need to periodically collect data from connected virtual infrastructure servers. When vcenter Server or an ESX(i) host is initially added to Veeam ONE and a data collection is performed, Veeam ONE retrieves data about objects in your virtual infrastructure. For vcenter Servers, Veeam ONE Business View additionally retrieves a list of custom attributes and custom attribute values, or tags and tag values. Custom attributes and tags are used as a means for initial categorization if necessary, you can map existing custom attributes or tags to business categories. During subsequent data collection sessions, Veeam ONE retrieves data about new virtual infrastructure objects and new custom attributes or tags from vcenter Server, and updates information in the Veeam ONE database. If you have enabled updates of custom attributes or tags, Veeam ONE Business View also writes categorization values to corresponding custom attributes or tags on the vcenter Server side. Only values that have been changed since the last data collection session are updated. Data collection can be run manually or scheduled to be run at specific time on some weekdays, or with some periodicity. For more information, see Scheduling Data Collection. 274 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

275 Accessing Veeam ONE Business View To start working with Veeam ONE Business View: 1. Access the Veeam ONE Business View website using one of the following options: You can open Veeam ONE Business View locally, on the machine where the Veeam ONE Web UI component is installed. To do so, in the Windows Programs menu choose Veeam ONE Business View. You can access Veeam ONE Business View remotely using your web browser. To do so, browse to the following address (assuming the default port 1340): 2. Provide credentials for the user account being a member of the Veeam ONE Administrators or Veeam ONE Read-Only Users group (these are user groups created on the machine where the Veeam ONE Web UI component is installed). 3. [For Internet Explorer users] If you log in for the first time, add the Veeam ONE Business View website to the list of Trusted sites. Navigating Veeam ONE Business View Veeam ONE Business View includes a set of views for performing different user activities: The Dashboard view displays summary information about objects in the managed virtual environment. It acts as a basic monitoring panel that provides an overview of the virtual infrastructure and the categorization model. The Workspace view is the main working area of Veeam ONE Business View. It lists all objects with their categorization data and allows you to view and edit data, as well as export virtual infrastructure business topology information to Microsoft Excel. The VM, Host, Storage and Cluster views display information about the business topology of the virtual environment. These views act as detailed monitoring panels: they present the virtual environment data from the perspective of business view categories. The categorization data is presented both in graphic charts and tables. Every chart in these views displays information about the total number of VMs/hosts/storage objects/clusters that relate to specific groups, and the total of used resources, such as vcpu, memory and storage for these objects united into a group. In these views, you can confirm object categorization or export to Microsoft Excel a list of objects that are not categorized yet and require additional review. To learn more about activities that can be performed in the Dashboard, VM, Host, Storage and Cluster views, see Working with Dashboards. The Configuration view is intended for configuring basic application settings: defining rules, working with categories and groups, changing the application options, using the export, import and synchronization features. The Configuration view is a take-off point to start working with Veeam ONE Business View, you must first configure all necessary settings. To learn more about activities that can be performed in the Configuration view, see Configuring Veeam ONE Business View. 275 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

276 Configuring Veeam ONE Business View To start working with the Veeam ONE Business View, you need to perform a number of steps for its initial configuration: 1. Set up your categorization model. You can add categories, create static or dynamic groups within every category, and configure categorization rules. For details, see Configuring Categorization Scheme. 2. Configure import/export settings if you need to map vcenter custom attributes and tags to Veeam ONE Business View categories, or if you want to synchronize Veeam ONE Business View categorization values with data rendered by other applications. For details, see Configuring Import and Export Settings. 3. Review and change Veeam ONE Business View options if required. For details, see Configuring Options. All initial configuration tasks are performed in the Configuration view of the application. Note: The Configuration view can be accessed only by users being members of the Veeam ONE Administrators groups. To learn more about Veeam ONE security groups, refer to Veeam ONE Deployment Guide. 276 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

277 Configuring Categorization Scheme After you have connected virtual infrastructure servers in Veeam ONE Monitor and run data collection, you need to configure the categorization scheme: 1. Create categories that describe logical divisions or sectors of your virtual infrastructure from the business standpoint. For details, see Creating Categories. 2. For every category, create groups that will act as containers for virtual infrastructure objects. These can be either static or dynamic groups. For details, see Creating Groups. 3. If you choose to work with static groups, you can additionally create categorization rules and assign them to specific groups. With categorization rules, you will be able to automatically populate static groups with virtual infrastructure objects. For details, see Configuring Categorization Rules. 4. If you are already using vcenter Server custom attributes or tags to categorize your virtual infrastructure, you can synchronize the Veeam ONE Business View categorization scheme with the categorization scheme you are using on the vcenter Server side. For details, see Synchronizing Infrastructure Mapping. Creating Categories To start categorizing your virtual environment, you must create categories that will be used to present your virtual infrastructure from the business standpoint. Out of the box, Veeam ONE Business View comes with the following predefined categories: Datastore dynamically groups VMs by datastore where VM files reside Last Backup Date dynamically groups VMs by the age of the latest backup or replica restore point created with Veeam Backup & Replication Sample Business View Category dynamically groups VMs by VM name SLA a category with static groups for all types of virtual infrastructure objects Storage type dynamically groups storage objects by type VMs with snapshots dynamically groups VMs with snapshots by the snapshot age You can add custom categories to create your own business view categorization scheme. The maximum number of categories is 25. To create a new category: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Categories in the Configuration section menu. 3. Click the Add button at the top of the category list. 4. In the Friendly name field, enter the name for a category. This name will be displayed as a label for the category graphs on the Dashboard. 5. In the Custom attribute to use field, enter the name of a vcenter Server custom attribute or tag to which the category will be mapped. If you are not planning to enable updates of the custom attributes and tags on the vcenter Server side, you still need to fill out this field. The specified values will be stored in the Veeam ONE database; when you enable updates to vcenter Server, the specified value will be written to vcenter Server as a custom attribute or tag. 277 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

278 6. From the Group type list, select the type of groups which can be created within the category static or dynamic. 7. From the Choose object type list, select the type of virtual infrastructure objects that will be described with this category cluster, host, storage object, virtual machine or all types of objects. Note: If you choose cluster or All as the object type, you will be able to create only static groups within the category. It is not possible to create dynamic groups for categorizing clusters. 8. Use the "Not set" group on charts list to define whether it is necessary to display on Business View charts information about uncategorized objects. If you select Show, data on uncategorized objects will included into charts and labeled as Not set. If you select Hide, data on uncategorized objects will be hidden from charts. 9. Click OK to add the new category. To edit a category, select it in the list and click the Edit button at the top of the list. Note that in the edit mode, you cannot change the group type or select a different object type for a category with dynamic groups. To delete a category, select it in the list and click the Delete button at the top of the list. Note: If a category contains at least one group, you cannot delete it. You need to delete all static groups or remove the grouping expression for dynamic group first. Then, you can delete the empty category. Creating Groups After you have created categories, you must create a set of groups for every category. You can create either static or dynamic groups. To include objects in static groups, you can either manually add objects to groups, or you can create a categorization rule that will be used to populate groups with objects based on certain criteria. Dynamic groups are populated automatically based on a certain conditional expression. When you define a grouping expression, Veeam ONE Business View automatically analyzes properties of discovered infrastructure objects, creates necessary groups and includes objects in these groups. 278 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

279 Creating Static Groups To create a static group: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Groups in the Configuration section menu. 3. Select a category for which you want to create a group. All existing categories are shown as tabs at the top of the group list. To add groups for a specific category, open the necessary tab. 4. Click the Add button at the top of the group list. 5. In the Friendly Name field, enter the group name. The name will be displayed as the group name on the Dashboard. 6. In the Custom attribute value field, specify the value for the custom attribute or tag that is mapped to the parent category. When you assign a virtual infrastructure object to this group and run data collection, this value will be written to a corresponding custom attribute or tag on the vcenter Server side. If you are not planning to enable updates of custom attributes and tags on the vcenter Server side, you still need to fill out this field. The specified values will be stored in the Veeam ONE database; when you enable updates to vcenter Server, the values will be written to custom attributes and tags in vcenter Server. 7. In the Description field, enter the description for the created group. 8. Click OK to save the new group for the current category. To edit a group, select it in the list and click the Edit button at the top of the list. To delete a group, select the group in the list and click the Delete button. Important! If there are any rules associated with a specific group, Veeam ONE Business View will not allow you to delete the group until all associated rules are deleted. 279 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

280 Creating Dynamic Groups To create a dynamic group: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Groups in the Configuration section menu. 3. Select a category for which you want to create a group. All existing categories are shown as tabs at the top of the group list. To add groups for a specific category, open the necessary tab. 4. Click the Grouping Expression button. 5. In the Edit Grouping Expression window you can type the expression or use the lists at the bottom to create the expression. See Appendix E. Grouping Expressions Syntax and Examples for details on the syntax of grouping expressions and examples. 6. At the bottom of the window you can see what the result of the expression will look like for a random object. To see the expression result for a specific object (a specific VM, host, cluster or storage object), type the name of the object in the Choose sample object field. 7. Click OK to save changes. After you save the grouping expression, Veeam ONE Business View will run the expression against the discovered virtual infrastructure objects. Results returned by the grouping expression will be displayed as the category groups. 280 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

281 Dynamic groups cannot be edited or deleted manually. To edit dynamic groups, update the grouping expression as necessary. To delete all groups from the dynamic group type category, clear the grouping expression from the Expression field. 281 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

282 Configuring Categorization Rules To automate population of static groups with virtual infrastructure objects, you can create categorization rules. A categorization rule is a condition associated with a specific static group. The condition is checked against discovered virtual infrastructure objects: if an object meets the condition, it is included in the static group automatically (or excluded from the group, if the rule is configured to exclude objects). Alternatively, the object can be placed to the Require Approval group, awaiting the administrator s confirmation to be categorized. Out of the box, Veeam ONE Business View comes with the vpower NFS Datastores rule that is used to exclude Veeam vpower NFS datastores from categorization. Note: Categorization rules can only be used for VMs, hosts and storage objects. Clusters must be added to static groups manually. To create a categorization rule for a static group, perform the following steps. Step 1. Launch the Rule Wizard To create a new categorization rule, launch the Rule wizard: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Rules in the Configuration section menu. 3. Click the Create New button on the toolbar. Step 2. Specify Rule Name and Description At the Name and Description step of the wizard, specify the rule name and description. 282 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

283 Step 3. Select the Object Type At the Object Type step of the wizard, select the type of virtual infrastructure objects to which the created rule must apply virtual machines, hosts or storage objects. Step 4. Select Infrastructure Level At the Apply to step of the wizard, select the scope of the virtual infrastructure for which the created rule will be used. Step 5. Select the Rule Type At the Type step of the wizard, select the type of the created rule: By object name select this option if you want to create a condition that will be checked against names of virtual infrastructure objects. By infrastructure location select this option if you want to include in a static group objects that belong to a specific level of the virtual infrastructure hierarchy (the level you specified at the previous step of the wizard). For example, you can use this type of rule to include in a group all VMs belonging to a specific cluster, resource pool or folder in the vcenter Server hierarchy. 283 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

284 By object properties select this option if you want to include in a group objects based on certain object properties. For example, you can filter out VMs by such properties as amount of memory, guest OS, virtual disk size, and so on. Step 6. Specify the Rule Condition Specify the rule condition. The condition will be checked against discovered virtual infrastructure objects. You need to specify the rule condition if you selected the By object name or By object properties option at the previous step of the wizard. If you selected the By infrastructure location type of rule, you will pass immediately to the categorization step. If you chose to group objects by name, enter a text pattern and specify a condition using the Contains, Does not contain, Starts with, Ends with or Wildcard matching operators. Keep in mind that rules of this type are not case sensitive. 284 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

285 If you chose to group objects by object properties, create a condition using virtual infrastructure object properties: select an object property, choose a conditional operator and specify a value that will be checked in the condition. Note that decimal values are not allowed. If necessary, you can combine several conditions. Use the Add Condition button at the top right corner to add new conditions to the list. From the topmost list, select logical relationships between the conditions: specify whether the rule should be applied only when all conditions are true or whether the rule should be applied when any condition is true. Step 7. Select the Rule Action At the Categorization step of the wizard, specify rule action settings: 1. In the Assign this group list select a static group in which virtual infrastructure objects will be included if they match the specified rule conditions. 2. In the Apply rule list select the type of approval for including virtual infrastructure objects in a static group: If you select Automatically, an object that matches rule conditions will be included in a group automatically, as soon as it is detected in the virtual hierarchy. If you select Require manual approval, an object that matches the rule conditions will not be included in the group automatically. Instead, it will be placed to the Require Approval group. The administrator will need to confirm categorization manually to include the object into the group. To learn more about confirmation of categorization, see Confirming Categorization. 3. To create an exclusive rule, select the Exclude from categorization check box. If this option is selected, all objects that match with the rule conditions will be excluded from categorization. 285 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

286 Step 8. Finish Working with the Wizard After you have specified the rule settings, click Finish. Categorization rules work in real-time mode: as soon as a categorization rule is created, it is immediately used to categorize VMs, hosts and storage objects in the virtual environment. Note: If you have enabled updates of custom attributes or tags in the Options section, the categorization values set for clusters, hosts, VMs and datastores will be written to custom attributes or tags on the vcenter Server side only at the next run of data collection. Setting Rule Priorities When you add more than one rule for categorization, you can set priorities according to which rules should be applied. The priority of a rule defines the rule importance: if two or more rules apply to the same object, a rule with a lower priority level is overridden with the rule of a higher priority. Rules with higher priority are displayed higher in the list. Veeam ONE Business View assigns a specific priority value to every rule: 1 is assigned to the most important rule, 2 is assigned to a less important rule and so on. Rules with higher priority are displayed higher in the list. To change the priority levels of categorization rules: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Rules in the Configuration section menu. 3. Click the Edit Priorities button on the toolbar. 4. Use arrows in the left column to move the rules up and down the list to change their priority level. Note: Rules that exclude objects from categorization are not prioritized and will always override other rules. 286 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

287 Configuring Import and Export Settings You can synchronize categorization data stored in the Veeam ONE Business View database with vcenter Server or other applications. Mapping Custom Attributes to Business View Categories If you are already using vcenter Server custom attributes or tags to categorize your virtual infrastructure, you can map vcenter Server custom attributes or tags to Veeam ONE Business View categories using the Group import Wizard. In the wizard, you can associate vcenter Server custom attributes or tags with the Veeam ONE Business View categorization scheme. You can then enable updates of custom attributes or tags to synchronize categorization data stored in the Veeam ONE database with custom attributes or tags stored on the vcenter Server side. Step 1. Launch the Group Import Wizard To launch the Group import Wizard: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Import/Export in the Configuration section menu. 3. In the Map custom attributes from VI Management Server section, click the Run Wizard button. Step 2. Map Custom Attributes to Categories At the Assign Mapping step of the wizard, the Group import Wizard displays a list of custom attributes or tags that exist on the vcenter Server side. To map vcenter custom attributes or tags to Veeam ONE Business View categories, select corresponding values from the list in the Category column next to necessary custom attributes. Step 3. Review Custom Attribute Values After you have mapped vcenter Server custom attributes or tags to Veeam ONE Business View categories, the Group import Wizard will display all values of the mapped custom attributes or tags so that you can review and adjust them. The values for mapped categories or tags are displayed in turn, one category per step. The left pane contains all detected custom attribute or tag values. To adjust a value, click it in the Collected attribute values list. As soon as you click a value, its name is displayed in the Friendly name field. The friendly name will be used as a group name in Veeam ONE Business View. You can set any friendly name for a group this can be helpful, for example, if the existing value contains constrictions or typos or you want to bring the group names to the same style. 287 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

288 In the Description field, you can enter a group description. You can change the Friendly name and Description values at any moment of time: to do so, click Categories on the left of the Configuration view and edit data of a necessary group as required. The adjusted custom attribute values will be presented as static groups within corresponding categories (for details on static/dynamic groups, see Creating Groups). Step 4. Finish Working with the Wizard After you made all necessary adjustments, click Finish. 288 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

289 Exporting and Importing Infrastructure Mapping You can synchronize business topology information with categorization data from 3rd-party software. You can import and export data to and from a.csv file that includes infrastructure mapping data and acts as a medium between the two systems. For example, if you have already categorized your virtual infrastructure objects outside of Veeam ONE Business View, you can describe category values using a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet and then import these values to Veeam ONE Business View. To make sure that a.csv file is properly structured and will be processed without any errors during import, you can first export custom attributes mapping to a.csv file. To export mapping details into a.csv file: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Import/Export in the Configuration section menu. 3. Click the Export button. As an example or template for the necessary file structure, you can create several groups for the default categories in Veeam ONE Business View, add several objects to them and export data into the.csv file. When you fill the necessary details into the file, use the Import button to write categorization data to Veeam ONE Business View. However, you can also create the.csv file from scratch. In this case, make sure that the file is structured correctly. Every record in the file should contain information about a virtual infrastructure object. The following columns are mandatory for every record: vcenterserver name of the vcenter Server or ESX(i) host where the object resides ObjectType type of object (possible values are VirtualMachine, HostSystem, Storage, ClusterComputerResource) MoRef reference number of the object ComputerName domain name of the virtual machine IPAddress IP address of the virtual machine Name name the virtual infrastructure object Other columns in the.csv file must be named as Veeam ONE Business View categories. Such category fields (or cells) accept two types of values: name of a group within the category to which a virtual infrastructure object belongs or the word Excluded, if the object should be excluded from categorization. 289 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

290 vcenter Server Object Type MoRef Computer Name IPAddress Name Category1 server.local Virtual Machine vm-01 Win2008-exch Exchang e01 Group1 server.local Virtual Machine vm-02 Win2003-sql SQL01 Excluded There are several points which you should take into account when creating a mapping file: 1. Objects cannot be included in dynamic groups. 2. Categories and static groups that do not exist in Veeam ONE Business View will be automatically created if they are specified in the.csv file. 3. Virtual infrastructure objects that are already known to Veeam ONE Business View (that is, data collection for the corresponding virtual server was already run) will be included into corresponding groups, as specified in the.csv file. 4. You can specify the word Excluded in a category cell if an object should be excluded from categorization. Synchronizing Infrastructure Mapping You can synchronize infrastructure mapping from 3-rd party applications and systems (for example, Active Directory) with Veeam ONE Business View. In the Import/Export view, you can specify path to a.csv file with the required categorization model, which should be used for synchronization and, if necessary, a script that creates this.csv file based on data from a third party application or system. Note: The.CSV file used for synchronization must be structured correctly. For details, see the Exporting and Importing Infrastructure Mapping section. The basic procedure for synchronizing infrastructure mapping is as follows: 1. Create the script file. 2. Create a file that runs the script and writes the results into a.csv file. 3. Specify the path to the file which runs the script and path to the resulting.csv file. See Appendix F. Sample Synchronization Script for a description of the above procedure on a sample script. 290 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

291 Configuring Options To review Veeam ONE Business View configuration options and adjust them: 1. Open the Configuration section. 2. Click Options in the Configuration section menu. 3. In the Operation mode section, define whether categorization data from Veeam ONE Business View database must be written to custom attributes or tags on the vcenter Server side. By default, the Do not update objects with custom attributes and vsphere Tags option is selected is selected, which means that categorization data from the Veeam ONE Business View does not update custom attributes or tags in the vcenter Server database. To update categorization data on the vcenter Server side every time when data collection for the vcenter Server runs, select one of the following options: Use vsphere Tags to categorize objects (vsphere 5.5 or later is requried) if Veeam ONE Business View must update vcenter Server tag values for clusters, hosts, VMs and datastores. Use custom attributes to categorize objects if Veeam ONE Business View must update vcenter Server custom attribute values for hosts and VMs. 4. Use the Set dashboard group number box to set the number of groups to display on the Dashboard for every category. For details, see Working with Dashboards. 5. To hide some or all of the additional dashboard views, select the VM, Host, Storage and/or Cluster check boxes. For details, see Working with Dashboards. 6. To sort groups by name in the VM, Host, Storage and Cluster views, select the Sort groups by name check box. If this option is disabled, groups will be sorted by the number of included virtual infrastructure objects. 291 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

292 Categorizing VI Objects After you have added virtual infrastructure servers and configured your categorization scheme, you can proceed to categorizing virtual infrastructure objects in your virtual environment. All major activities on categorizing virtual infrastructure objects can be performed in the Workspace view of the application this is the place where you can manually assign the necessary categorization values to objects of your virtual environment. For details, see Assigning Categorization Values. To obtain information on categorized, uncategorized and excluded from categorization objects, use the VM/Host/Storage/Cluster dashboard views. The dashboard views also allow you to confirm categorization of virtual infrastructure objects. For details, see Confirming Categorization. Assigning Categorization Values The Workspace view displays all discovered VMs, hosts, clusters and storages objects in the virtual infrastructure. Every virtual infrastructure object is described with a certain set of properties. For example, VMs are described with the following properties: name, path, number of vcpus, memory and storage resources allocated to it, guest OS, and VM categorization data. The Workspace section is a main means for manual categorization of VMs, hosts, clusters and storage objects in your virtual environment. Using the Workspace, you can assign necessary category values to a single virtual infrastructure object or to a number of objects at a time. Note: To be able to categorize virtual infrastructure objects, the user must belong to the Veeam ONE Administrators user group. Users who do not belong to this group cannot categorize objects the Edit Category button is disabled for these users. For details on Veeam ONE security groups, refer to Veeam ONE Deployment Guide. To search for the necessary virtual infrastructure objects, use filters at the top of the list: To display objects matching specific criteria, select necessary values in the Object type, Infrastructure node or Category field and click the Apply Filter button or press [Enter]. To search for an object by name, enter the name or a part of it in the Name field and click the Apply Filter button or press [Enter]. To assign category values to one or more virtual infrastructure objects: 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Select an object in the list and click the Edit Category button on the toolbar. Alternatively, you can or double-click the object in the list. Use the [SHIFT] or [CTRL] keys to select multiple objects. 292 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

293 3. In the Edit Category window, select necessary groups from the category lists. 4. If you do not want an object to take part in the categorization model, select the Excluded from categorization check box. Excluded objects will be excluded from the business view inventory of your virtual environment. 5. Click OK. To discard your changes and update the categorization data in accordance with existing rules, click the Re-Apply Rules button. If an object does not fall under any group by existing categorization rules, all its category settings will be set back to Uncategorized. 293 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

294 Confirming Categorization To obtain information on categorized, uncategorized and excluded from categorization objects: 1. Open the VM/Host/Storage/Cluster dashboard. 2. Click the Details link at the top right corner. In Veeam ONE Business View, all virtual infrastructure objects are divided into the following groups: Uncategorized objects that are not categorized yet. Require Approval objects that await categorization approval. These objects fall under categorization rules, but you need to additionally confirm categorization of these objects to include them in corresponding static groups. Approved objects that fall under categorization rules and their categorization is already approved. Auto-Approved objects that were automatically categorized with the help of categorization rules. Excluded from categorization objects that were excluded from categorization. Use the Request Status list to filter the list of objects by their status. The Require Approval, Approved and Auto-approved groups describe objects that meet conditions of categorization rules. The Approved, Auto-approved and Excluded from categorization groups do not require any additional actions Objects from the Require Approval group require confirmation to be categorized. To approve objects for categorization, select check boxes next to necessary records in the list and click the Approve button on the toolbar. As a result, the objects will be moved to the Approved group. To export categorization status list to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file, click Export to Excel button. Veeam ONE Business View will generate a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, and save it to the download location on your computer. 294 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

295 Exporting Object Data to Excel You can export categorization data to an external Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file and save it for sharing or documenting purposes. 1. Open the Workspace section. 2. Click the Export to Excel button at the top of the list. Veeam ONE Business View will generate a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet, and save it to the download location on your computer. Working with Dashboards The Dashboard view displays summary categorization information about objects in your environment. It acts as a basic monitoring panel allowing you to see an overview of the virtual infrastructure and the categorization model. The VM, Host, Storage and Cluster views display information about the business topology of your virtual environment. These views act as detailed monitoring panels: they present the virtual environment data from the perspective of business view categories. The categorization data is presented both in graphic charts and tables. Each dashboard view is split into category sections that present the data from the business standpoint via graphs and data tables. Each section provides information on how many objects (depending on the selected dashboard view) belong to groups of a specific category, and the total of their vcpu, memory and storage resources. 295 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

296 Note: If necessary, you can change the number of groups displayed on dashboards. For details, see Configuring Options. You can toggle each category section between graphical and table representation using the Chart and Data buttons on the right side of the each section (above the chart legend). In the VM, Host, Storage and Cluster views, there is also an additional service section at the top which provides information on the number of uncategorized objects, objects awaiting categorization approval and objects excluded from the categorization model. This service section allows the user to confirm object categorization by created categorization rules. To open the categorization approval view, click the Details link in the top right corner (see Confirming Categorization for more information on approving categorization). By default, graphs and data tables for each category display categorization data for up to 3 groups to which the most number of objects belong; plus an additional Other group is used to display summary data for objects from all other groups. If you wish to view data on every group in the category on one graph/table, click the Details button in the bottom right corner of the chart. 296 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

297 APPENDICES The chapter includes the following appendices: Appendix A. Alarm Rules and Events Appendix B. Veeam ONE Settings Utility Appendix C. Custom Charts for Report-Based Widgets Appendix D. Scheduling Script Examples Appendix E. Grouping Expressions Syntax and Examples Appendix F. Sample Synchronization Script 297 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

298 Appendix A. Alarm Rules and Events This appendix provides reference information for Veeam ONE alarms and rules that can be used to trigger alarms. Veeam Backup & Replication Alarms This section describes predefined alarms and associated alarm events for Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure components. Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager connection failure N/A Error Veeam ONE failed to connect to Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager. Veeam Backup & Replication Server Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description Backup copy job state VeeamBpBackupSync SessionErrorEvent VeeamBpBackupSync SessionWarningEvent Error Warning One or more VMs could not be successfully copied from the backup repository. Backup job state VeeamBpBackup SessionErrorEvent VeeamBpBackup SessionWarningEvent Error Warning One or more VMs failed to backup successfully. VeeamBpFileTape SessionErrorEvent Error Backup to tape job status VeeamBpVmTape SessionErrorEvent VeeamBpFileTape SessionWarningEvent Error Warning One or more VMs failed to be transferred to the tape device. VeeamBpVmTape SessionWarningEvent Warning File copy job state VeeamBpCopySession ErrorEvent VeeamBpCopySession WarningEvent Error Warning One or more files failed to be transferred to the destination folder. License expiration date VeeamBackupServer LicenseExpiration VeeamBackupServer LicenseChanged Warning Resolved Veeam Backup & Replication license expired. Max allowed job duration N/A Error Warning Job has exceeded its allowed execution time. Quick migration VeeamBpQMigration Error One or more VMs failed to migrate 298 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

299 Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description job state SessionErrorEvent to another host. VeeamBpQMigration SessionWarningEvent Warning Replication job state VeeamBpRepSession ErrorEvent VeeamBpRepSession WarningEvent Error Warning One or more VMs failed to replicate successfully. Support expiration date VeeamBackupServer LicenseSupportExpirati on VeeamBackupServer LicenseChanged Warning Resolved Veeam Backup & Replication prepaid support contract expired. SureBackup job state VeeamBpSbSession ErrorEvent VeeamBpSbSession WarningEvent Error Warning One or more VMs couldn't be successfully verified. Veeam Backup & Replication Server connection failure N/A Error Connection to Veeam Backup & Replication server failed. Repository Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description Backup repository connection failure N/A Error Veeam Backup & Replication server lost connection to the backup repository. Backup repository free space N/A Error Warning Backup repository is low on free space. Backup repository version is out-ofdate N/A Warning Veeam backup repository version does not match the version of Veeam Backup & Replication server. Proxy Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description Backup proxy connection failure N/A Error Veeam Backup & Replication server lost connection to the proxy server. Backup proxy version is out-ofdate N/A Warning Veeam backup proxy version does not match the version of Veeam Backup & Replication server. 299 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

300 WAN Accelerator Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description WAN accelerator connection state N/A Error Veeam Backup & Replication server lost connection to the WAN accelerator. WAN accelerator version is out-ofdate N/A Warning Veeam WAN accelerator version does not match the version of Veeam Backup & Replication server. Cloud Repository Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description Cloud repository free space N/A Error Warning Cloud repository is low on available free space. Cloud repository lease expiration date N/A Warning Cloud repository lease time is about to expire. Cloud Gateway Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description Cloud gateway connection state N/A Error Veeam Backup & Replication server lost connection to the cloud gateway. Cloud gateway version is out-ofdate N/A Warning Veeam cloud gateway version does not match the version of Veeam Backup & Replication server. Tape Server Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description Tape server connection state N/A Error Veeam Backup & Replication server lost connection to the tape server. Tape server version is out-of-date N/A Warning Veeam tape server version does not match the version of Veeam Backup & Replication server. 300 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

301 Internal Alarms The following table describes internal Veeam ONE Monitor alarms and associated alarm events. Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description Backup performance data collection failure VeeamBpPerfCollection FailedEvent VeeamMonitorServices StartedEvent VeeamBpPerfCollection FailedResolvedEvent Error Resolved Resolved Veeam ONE server failed to collect performance data from the specified backup server. VeeamEventCollection FailedEvent Error Events data collection failure VeeamEventCollection FailedResolvedEvent Resolved Veeam ONE Monitor server failed to collect events data from the objects specified. VeeamMonitorServices StartedEvent Resolved Hardware sensors collection failure VeeamHardwareSensors CollectionEvent VeeamHardwareSensors CollectionResolvedEvent Error Resolved Veeam ONE failed to collect host hardware information. Performance data collection failure VeeamPerfCollection FailedEvent VeeamPerfCollection FailedResolvedEvent VeeamMonitorServices StartedEvent Error Resolved Resolved Veeam ONE Monitor server failed to collect performance data from the objects specified. SQL Server connection failure VeeamNoDbConnection Event VeeamNoDbConnection ResolvedEvent Error Resolved Veeam ONE Monitor server cannot access its database. SQL Server Express database size VeeamSqlLowDbFreeSpace Event VeeamSqlLowDbFreeSpace ResolvedEvent VeeamMonitorServices StartedEvent Warning Resolved Resolved Veeam ONE database size is close to maximum database size supported by SQL Server Express Edition. VeeamInfCollectionFailed Event Error Topology collection failure VeeamInfCollectionFailed ResolvedEvent Resolved Veeam ONE Monitor server failed to collect infrastructure topology. VeeamMonitorServices StartedEvent Resolved vcloud Director blocking tasks VeeamVcdBlockingTask UpdateFailedEvent Error Veeam ONE server failed to update vcloud Director 301 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

302 Alarm Name Rule Event Severity Description update failure VeeamVcdBlockingTask UpdateFailedResolvedEvent Resolved blocking tasks list. vcloud Director connection failure VeeamNoVcdHost ConnectionEvent VeeamNoVcdHost ConnectionResolvedEvent VeeamMonitorServices StartedEvent Error Resolved Resolved Veeam ONE server failed to collect performance and configuration data from vcloud Director. vcloud Director stranded items update failure VeeamVcdStrandedItem UpdateFailedEvent VeeamVcdStrandedItem UpdateFailedResolvedEvent Error Resolved Veeam ONE server failed to update vcloud Director stranded items list. Veeam ONE license expiration date VeeamLicenseExpiration WarningEvent VeeamLicenseChangedEvent Warning Resolved Veeam ONE license is going to expire soon. Veeam ONE license sockets exceeded VeeamSocketExceedEvent VeeamSocketExceedResolved Event Error Resolved The number of licensed servers has exceeded. Veeam ONE support expiration date VeeamLicenseSupport ExpirationWarningEvent VeeamLicenseChanged Event Warning Resolved Veeam ONE support period is going to expire soon. VeeamNoHostConnection Event Error Virtual Server connection failure VeeamNoHostConnection ResolvedEvent Resolved Connection to virtual server has failed. VeeamMonitorServices StartedEvent Resolved 302 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

303 Alarm Rules This section describes rules that can be used to create alarms for virtual infrastructure and data protection monitoring. Alarm Rules for Virtual Infrastructure Veeam ONE offers the following types of alarm rules for VMware vsphere infrastructure objects: Object Rule Type Description vcenter Server Cluster Host Virtual Machine Event-based rule Rule for specific conditions or state Event-based rule Event-based rule Hardware sensor state changes Number of VMs is out of allowed range Power or connection state changes Resource usage is out of allowed range Event-based rule Orphaned Veeam Backup & Replication snapshot has been detected Heartbeat is missing Power or connection state changes Resource usage is out of allowed range An alarm is triggered if some vcenter-related event is generated. An alarm is triggered if the state of vcenter Server is equal or not equal to the specified value (for example, if the vcenter Server is not responding). An alarm is triggered if some cluster-related event is generated. An alarm is triggered if some host-related event is generated. An alarm is trigged if the sensor state reports to be equal or not equal to a specific state value (Normal, Warning, Alert). An alarm is triggered if the number of running, powered off or suspended VMs on the ESX(i) host exceeds the specified threshold value. This type of alarm can be configured if it is necessary to limit the number of VMs running on the ESX(i) host at the same time to avoid the host overload. An alarm is triggered if the host state reports to be equal or not equal to a specific state value (for example, if the ESX(i) host is not responding). An alarm is triggered if the specified counter is above or below the specified threshold value (for example, if the CPU usage exceeds 75%). An alarm is triggered if some VM-related event is generated (for example, if the MAC address of the VM conflicts with the MAC address of another VM existing in the virtual infrastructure). An alarm is triggered if a VM has a snapshot that Veeam Backup & Replication created (to back up, replicate or perform another data protection operation for the VM) but was unable to remove when the operation was over. An alarm is triggered if a monitored virtual machine is not available or overloaded for a specific period of time (for example, if heartbeat is missing for 5 minutes). An alarm is triggered if the state of the VM reports to be equal or not equal to the specified state value (for example, if the VM is suspended). An alarm is triggered if the specified counter is above or below the specified value (for example, if the CPU 303 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

304 Object Rule Type Description ready level exceeds 5%). Datastore Guest volumes are running out of free disk space Snapshot age for VM has exceeded the configured threshold VM snapshots number has exceeded the configured threshold Snapshot size for VM is out of allowed range VMware VM tools VMs with no backups Event-based rule Datastore is running out of free space Datastore provisioned space Performance counter is out of allowed range Power or connection state changes An alarm is triggered if available disk space on guest volumes is below the specified threshold value. You can choose to specify the amount of due free space as an absolute value (for example, if free disk space falls below 1 GB) or a relative value (for example, if free disk space falls below 10% of total space). An alarm is triggered if the current snapshot is older than a specified number of hours. This rule helps monitor forgotten snapshots that are consuming valuable storage space and degrading performance of virtual machines. An alarm is triggered if the number of snapshots created for the VM is greater than the specified threshold. An alarm is triggered if the size of the VM snapshot is above or below the specified threshold value. You can choose to specify the size of the snapshot as an absolute value (for example, if the snapshot size exceeds 5 GB) or a relative value (for example, if the snapshot size exceeds 10% of total available disk space). An alarm is triggered if the state of the VMware Tools reports to be equal or not equal to the specified state value (for example, if the VMware Tools is out of date). An alarm is triggered if the age of the latest backup or replica restore point for the VM has exceeded the threshold (that is, if there are no restore points for the specified RPO period). An alarm is triggered if some datastore-related event is generated. An alarm is triggered if free space on the datastore is above or below the specified threshold value. You can choose to specify the free space threshold as an absolute value (for example, if the datastore space should not fall below 10 GB) or a relative value (for example, if the datastore free space should not fall below 15% of total space). An alarm is triggered if the provisioned disk space is above or below the specified threshold value. You can select to specify the threshold as an absolute value (for example, if the provisioned disk space should not exceed 500 GB) or a relative value (for example, if the provisioned disk space should not exceed 400% compared to the datastore capacity). An alarm is triggered if the specified counter is above or below the specified threshold value (for example, if the datastore I\O threshold is violated). An alarm is triggered if the state of the datastore reports to be equal or not equal to the specified state value (for example, if the datastore is not accessible). Any object Event-based rule An alarm is triggered if some event is generated on 304 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

305 Object Rule Type Description any object. vcloud Director vapp vcloud Director Organization vcloud Director Org VCD vcloud Director Provider VCD Event-based rule vcloud Director object task status vapp runtime lease timeout vapp storage lease timeout Event-based rule Organization VCD blocking task number Organization VCD blocking task timeout vcloud Director object task status Event-based rule Resource usage is out of allowed range vcloud Director object task status Network pool is running out of available IP addresses Event-based rule Resource usage is out of allowed range vcloud Director object task status An alarm is triggered if some event is generated on the vapp. An alarm is triggered if the vapp state reports to be equal or not equal to a specific state value (for example, if warnings are registered for the vapp). An alarm is triggered in N days after the vapp runtime lease has expired. An alarm is triggered in N days after the vapp storage lease has expired. An alarm is triggered if some event is generated on the organization. An alarm is triggered if the number of pending blocking tasks has exceeded the specified threshold. An alarm is triggered in N minutes after the blocking tasks has expired. An alarm is triggered if the organization state reports to be equal or not equal to a specific state value (for example, if warnings are registered for the organization). An alarm is triggered if some event is generated on the organization VCD. An alarm is triggered if the specified counter is above or below the specified value (for example, if the CPU ready level exceeds 5%). An alarm is triggered if the organization VCD state reports to be equal or not equal to a specific state value (for example, if warnings are registered for the organization VCD). An alarm is triggered if the number of remaining IP addresses is above or below the specified threshold value. You can select to specify the threshold as an absolute value (for example, if the number of remaining IP addresses should not be lower than 5) or a relative value ( if the number of remaining IP addresses should not be lower than 10% of the total number for the organization VCD network). An alarm is triggered if some event is generated on the provider VCD. An alarm is triggered if the specified counter is above or below the specified value (for example, if the storage usage exceeds 80%). An alarm is triggered if the provider VCD state reports to be equal or not equal to a specific state value (for example, if warnings are registered for the provider VCD). 305 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

306 Alarm Rules for Veeam Backup & Replication Veeam ONE Monitor offers the following types of alarm rules for Veeam Backup & Replication infrastructure objects: Object Rule Type Description Backup Enterprise Manager Backup Server Repository Proxy WAN Accelerator Event-based rule Power or connection state change Event-based rule Job duration exceeded the allowed time period Power or connection state change Event-based rule Out of date state changes Repository server is running out of free space Power or connection state changes Event-based rule Out of date state changes Power or connection state change Event-based rule Out of date state changes Power or connection An alarm is triggered if some Veeam Backup & Replication event is generated for the Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager. An alarm is triggered if the state of Veeam Backup Enterprise Manager is equal or not equal to the specified value (for example, if connection to the Enterprise Manager is lost). An alarm is triggered if some Veeam Backup & Replication event is generated for the backup server. An alarm is triggered if duration of a backup or replication job has exceeded a threshold duration value (specified in minutes). An alarm is triggered if the state of Veeam Backup server is equal or not equal to the specified value (for example, if connection to the backup server is lost). An alarm is triggered if some Veeam Backup & Replication event is generated for the repository. An alarm is triggered if Veeam Backup & Replication software components installed on the repository server are out of date. An alarm is triggered if free space on the repository is above or below the specified threshold value. You can select to specify the free space threshold as an absolute value (for example, if the storage space should not fall below 10 GB) or a relative value (for example, if the free space should not fall below 15% of total space). An alarm is triggered if the state of the backup repository is equal or not equal to the specified value (for example, if connection to the repository is lost). An alarm is triggered if some Veeam Backup & Replication event is generated for the backup proxy. An alarm is triggered if Veeam Backup & Replication software components installed on the proxy server are out of date. An alarm is triggered if the state of backup proxy is equal or not equal to the specified value (for example, if connection to the proxy server is lost). An alarm is triggered if some Veeam Backup & Replication event is generated for the WAN accelerator. An alarm is triggered if Veeam Backup & Replication software components installed on the WAN accelerator server are out of date. An alarm is triggered if the state of the WAN 306 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

307 Object Rule Type Description Cloud Repository Cloud Gateway Tape Server Any object state change Event-based rule Cloud repository lease expiration Repository server is running out of free space Event-based rule Event-based rule Event-based rule accelerator is equal or not equal to the specified value (for example, if connection to the WAN accelerator is lost). An alarm is triggered if some Veeam Backup & Replication event is generated for the cloud repository. An alarm is triggered if cloud repository lease time will expire in the specified number of days. An alarm is triggered if free space on the repository is above or below the specified threshold value. You can select to specify the free space threshold as an absolute value (for example, if the storage space should not fall below 10 GB) or a relative value (for example, if the free space should not fall below 15% of total space). An alarm is triggered if some Veeam Backup & Replication event is generated for the cloud gateway. An alarm is triggered if some Veeam Backup & Replication event is generated for the tape server. An alarm is triggered if some event occurs on any object. 307 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

308 Appendix B. Veeam ONE Settings Utility The Veeam ONE Settings utility allows you to change configuration of the Veeam ONE software components. Important! The Veeam ONE Settings utility must be used only under the guidance of Veeam Support. It is strongly recommended that you obtain detailed instructions from the Veeam Support team before changing any configuration settings in your Veeam ONE deployment. To run the Veeam ONE Settings utility: 1. Open Veeam ONE Monitor. 2. Click Options on the toolbar and select Server Settings. Alternatively, you can press [CTRL+S] on the keyboard. 3. Open the Other Settings tab. 4. In the Support utility section, click the Launch button. 308 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

309 General Settings The General section groups configuration settings common for all Veeam ONE software components. Database On the Database tab, you can view and modify connection settings for the Veeam ONE database. In the SQL Server section, you can modify connection settings for the Veeam ONE database and the SQL Server that hosts this database. By default, the fields are populated with the values specified during Veeam ONE installation. You can modify the following database configuration settings: 1. In the Server name field, specify the name of the SQL Server that hosts the Veeam ONE database. 2. In the Database name field, specify the name of the database that stores Veeam ONE data. 3. In the Command time-out field, specify the wait time in seconds for a command to execute on the Veeam ONE database. By default, the time-out value is set to seconds (5 hours). 4. In the Authentication list, select the type of authentication that Veeam ONE components must use for connecting to the SQL Server that hosts the Veeam ONE database. 5. In the User name/password fields, specify credentials of the Windows account used for connecting to the SQL Server that hosts the Veeam ONE database. The credentials must be specified only if the authentication type is set to Windows Authentication. User name must be specified in the domain/username format. 6. Click Save to apply new settings. To check if Veeam ONE components will be able to connect to the specified database using the effective connection settings, click Test Connection. To back up the Veeam ONE database to a.bak file, click Create Backup and specify the location where the database backup file must be saved. In the Information section, you can view the Veeam ONE database connection status and version number. 309 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

310 Execute SQL Script On the Execute SQL Script tab, you can choose a SQL script to run against the Veeam ONE database. As a rule, the script is provided by the Veeam Support team in the process of issue resolution. To run a script provided by Veeam Support: 1. Click Browse and specify location of the script file. 2. Click Run script. The script will be executed using the database connection settings specified on the Database tab. 3. After the script is executed, restart services Veeam ONE Monitor Server and Veeam ONE Reporter Server. Click Reporter in the utility menu, open the Service tab and click Restart. Click Monitor in the utility menu, open the Service tab and click Restart. Alternatively, you can restart these services in the Windows Services console. Restart of the services is required to update system objects in the Veeam ONE database. 310 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

311 Retention Policy Period On the Retention Policy tab, you can modify the period for which historical data must be stored in the Veeam ONE database. By default, data in the database is retained for 12 months. To modify the retention period: 1. In the Historical data retention period field, specify the retention period in months. You can specify any value from 1 to Click Save. 311 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

312 Web Identity On the Web Identity tab, you can change credentials of the account under which the Veeam ONE Reporter and Veeam ONE Business View websites run. Credentials of this account are specified during installation. In some cases, you might need to change these credentials (for example, if the password of the account has expired). To modify the credentials of the web identity account: 1. In the User name field, specify the account name. 2. In the Password field, specify the password. 3. Click Save. 312 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

313 Reporter Settings The Reporter section groups configuration settings for the Veeam ONE Reporter component. Service On the Service tab, you can start, stop or restart the Veeam ONE Reporter Server service. These operations may be required to complete Veeam ONE configuration updates. 313 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

314 Object Cleanup On the Object Cleanup tab, you can remove from the Veeam ONE database residual data on deleted infrastructure objects. In some cases, data collected from infrastructure objects remain in the Veeam ONE database even connections to these infrastructure objects were removed from the Veeam ONE Monitor console. In such situation, residual data may appear in Veeam ONE reports and so on. To clean data about such obsolete infrastructure objects from the Veeam ONE database: 1. Click Select and choose from the infrastructure hierarchy an object for which data must be removed. 2. Click Remove and wait for completion of the object data cleanup. 314 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

315 Website Settings On the Website Settings tab, you can change the Veeam ONE Reporter website address. In some cases, the website URL may be changed for example, if you changed the machine name where the Veeam ONE Web UI component runs. In such situation, you need to update the website URL in Veeam ONE configuration settings. Otherwise, you will not be able to launch reports directly from the Veeam ONE Monitor console. To change the Veeam ONE Reporter website address: 1. In the Website address field, specify the new Reporter website address. 2. Click Test to check if Veeam ONE Monitor will be able to access the website at the specified URL. 3. Click Save. 315 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

316 Monitor Settings The Monitor section groups configuration settings for the Veeam ONE Monitor component. Service On the Service tab, you can start, stop or restart the Veeam ONE Monitor Server service. These operations may be required to complete Veeam ONE configuration updates. 316 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

317 Deployment Configuration In the Deployment Configuration section, you can change the installation type. The installation type is specified during Veeam ONE installation. It defines the level of granularity used to store data in the Veeam ONE database. In some cases, you might need to change the installation type (for example, your infrastructure has grown rapidly in size, and you need to switch from the Typical installation type to Advanced Scalability). To change the deployment type: 1. In the Installation Type field, choose the necessary option Typical or Advanced Scalability. 2. Click Save. For details on installation types, see Veeam ONE Deployment Guide. Exporting Logs You can export service logs for the Veeam ONE Monitor, Reporter and Business View components. Typically, service logs are required by Veeam Support. 1. At the bottom left corner of the Veeam ONE Settings utility, click Export Logs. 2. Specify a location to which the exported logs must be saved. The Veeam ONE Settings utility will export logs and save them to a.zip archive in the specified location. 317 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

318 Appendix C. Custom Charts for Report-Based Widgets Veeam ONE Reporter allows you to create custom charts based on the Custom Infrastructure report and add these charts on dashboard widgets. You can present virtual infrastructure data with charts of the following types: Exploded Pie Charts Clustered Column Charts Stacked Columns Chart Depending on the type of chart you want to create, data sets to be selected and their presentation in the chart may vary. This section provides basic information on presenting data on charts and includes a number of examples that will help you to understand principles of working with custom chart. Presentation of Data in Charts To create a custom chart using dashboard widgets, you should select data that you want to present in the chart. As well as in standard charts, charts in Veeam ONE Reporter display series fields, category fields and data fields. Series fields represent values plotted in the chart. A series field is a set of related data that is distinguished by a unique color and presented in the chart legend. Category fields represent a criterion that will be used to group series fields. A category field is usually presented as a group of series fields on the horizontal axis. Data fields represent the type of values that should be aggregated into a single slice, bar or a column in the chart. Refer to the Aggregate Functions for Charts section to learn what types of aggregate functions can be used for data fields on charts. Every chart type requires a specific set of data for example, exploded pies are two-dimension charts so you need to select only the series fields and data fields, while for clustered column charts, you need to select series fields, category fields and data fields. Aggregate Functions in Charts Widget charts allow you to select one of the following aggregate functions for presenting report data: Function Avg Count CountDisti nct Max Min Sum Description Returns the average of values in the selected data fields. Returns the number of records in the selected data fields. Records with no values (empty records) are not taken into account. Returns the number of distinct values in the selected data fields. Returns the maximum value from the selected data fields. Returns the minimum value from the selected data fields. Returns the sum of values in the selected data fields. 318 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

319 Exploded Pie Charts Exploded pie charts allow you to show the size of values proportional to the sum of all values. Series fields in exploded pie charts are shown as unique values presented in the chart legend. Data fields are shown as slices that represent aggregate values (that is, a percentage of the whole pie). Category fields are not used for pie charts. Example Create a chart displaying the number of different OS es installed on VMs. The chart will visualize data from a simple report created on the basis of the Custom Infrastructure report template with the following report settings: Object type: Virtual Machine Report columns: Name, Guest OS To create an exploded pie chart: 1. In Veeam ONE Reporter, open the Dashboards section. 2. Choose to edit the necessary dashboard and launch the Add widget wizard. 3. In the Caption field, specify the widget name. 4. At the Widget pack step, select the Report based widgets option. 5. At the Widget step, choose the saved Custom Infrastructure report. 6. At the Widget type step, select Custom chart. 7. At the Chart type step, select ExplodedPie. 8. At the Add widget step specify the following settings: Select Guest OS as the Series fields value. Select Name as the Data fields value. From the Aggregate function list, select Count. 9. Finish working with the wizard. 319 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

320 Clustered Column Charts Clustered column charts allow you to compare values across one or more categories. Series fields in clustered column charts are shown as unique values presented in the chart legend. Data fields are organized along the vertical axis and shown as columns. Category fields are organized along the horizontal axis and shown as groups of columns. Example Create a chart that displays connectivity state of VMs on ESX(i) hosts that is, the number of connected, disconnected, invalid and orphaned VMs on every host. The chart will visualize data from a simple report created on the basis of the Custom Infrastructure report template with the following report settings: Object type: Virtual Machine Report columns: Name, Host system, Connection state. To create a clustered column chart: 1. In Veeam ONE Reporter, open the Dashboards section. 2. Choose to edit the necessary dashboard and launch the Add widget wizard. 3. In the Caption field, specify the widget name. 4. At the Widget packs step, select the Report based widgets option. 5. At the Widget info step, choose the saved Custom Infrastructure report. 6. At the Widget type step, select Custom chart. 7. At the Chart type step, select ClusteredColumn. 8. At the Add widget step specify the following settings: Select Connection state as the Series fields value. Select Host system as the Category fields value. Select Name as the Data fields value. From the Aggregate function list, select Count. 9. Finish working with the wizard. 320 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

321 Stacked Columns Chart Stacked column charts allow you to present several data series and emphasize their contribution to the whole. Stacked column charts show relation of series fields to the whole. In stacked columns, series fields are shown as unique values presented in the chart legend. Category fields are organized across the horizontal axis and presented as columns. Data fields are organized across the vertical axis and shown as stacked rectangles. Example Create a chart that displays the number of powered on, powered off and suspended VMs for every department in a company. The chart will visualize data from a simple report created on the basis of the Custom Infrastructure report template with the following report settings: Object type: Virtual Machine Business View object(s): Department Report columns: Name, Business View: Group, Power state. To create a stacked columns chart: 1. In Veeam ONE Reporter, open the Dashboards section. 2. Choose to edit the necessary dashboard and launch the Add widget wizard. 3. In the Caption field, specify the widget name. 4. At the Widget packs step, select the Report based widgets option. 5. At the Widget Info step, choose the saved Custom Infrastructure report. 6. At the Widget type step, select Custom chart. 7. At the Chart type step, select StackedColumn. 8. At the Add widget step specify the following settings: Select Power state as the Series fields value. Select Business View: Group as the Category fields value. Select Name as the Data fields value. From the Aggregate function list, select Count. 9. Finish working with the wizard. 321 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

322 Appendix D. Scheduling Script Examples To facilitate the process of dashboards and report creation, you can schedule automatic delivery of dashboards and reports. As one of the delivery options, Veeam ONE Reporter allows you to write created dashboards and reports to a folder on a hard drive or to a network share. To learn about scheduling dashboards and reports, see Scheduling Dashboards and Scheduling Reports. If you need to perform further manipulations with the saved files, you can configure Veeam ONE Reporter to you run a custom script after reports and dashboards are saved to the target folder. Veeam ONE Reporter allows you to use.bat,.cmd,.vbs,.js,.wsf,.exe,.vbe,.jse,.wsh,.psc1 scripts. You can pass the following parameters to post-delivery scripts: Parameter Decription %ReportName% %ReportFolder% Name of the generated report. Target folder to which created reports are saved (as specified in the Path field). %JobName% -hidden Name of the scheduling job that generates reports. Defines whether it is necessary to open created VMR reports with the Veeam Report Viewer. If the parameter is specified, the reports will not be opened. This section explains how to use post-delivery scripts and contains simple script examples. 322 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

323 Example A. Copying a Report to Network Shares Consider the following scenario: your backup administrators want to obtain a weekly report with the list of protected VMs in your virtual environment. To deliver the Protected VMs report to backup administrators on a weekly basis, you should take the following steps: 1. Save the Protected VMs report with the necessary parameters. 2. Create a script that will copy the report to network shares of backup administrators. 3. Set the necessary schedule for the report and specify the post-delivery script. Step 1. Save a Report Save the Protected VMs report with the necessary parameters as described in Saving Reports. Step 2. Create a Script When you schedule a report delivery to a folder or a network share, Veeam ONE Reporter saves the generated report to a target location by the following path: <TargetDirectory>\reporting-task-for-ssrs-report-<ReportName><ID>\ The sample script must perform the following operations after the report is created: 1. Access the target report location: C:\reports\reporting-task-for-ssrs-report-<ReportName><ID>\ 2. Copy the report from the target location to network shares: \\andy\shared\backups\reports\ \\brian\shared\backups\reports\ \\chris\shared\backups\reports\ 3. Remove the report from the target location and delete the target directory. An example of the script is provided below: ::Changing directory to the target report location cd reporting-task-for-ssrs-report* set RD=%cd% ::Copying the report from the target location to admins shares xcopy Protected*.* \\andy\shared\backups\reports\*.* /y xcopy Protected*.* \\brian\shared\backups\reports\*.* /y xcopy Protected*.* \\chris\shared\backups\reports\*.* /y ::Removing the target report location cd..\ rd %RD% /s/q Save the script as a Windows batch file on the machine where Veeam ONE is installed. To follow this example, save the script with the postdelivery.bat name to the C:\reports\ directory. 323 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

324 Step 3. Configure Scheduling Settings Before scheduling report delivery, make sure that: The account under which the Veeam ONE Reporter Server service runs has appropriate write permissions on the destination network shares. Collection session that gathers data from virtual servers, vcloud Director and Veeam Backup & Replication servers completes before the scheduled report generation time. Configure scheduling settings for the saved report as follows: 1. In Veeam ONE Reporter, open the Workspace section. 2. Click the saved report in the list to open its properties. 3. Click Scheduling in the Actions pane on the right. 4. In the Scheduling Report Administration window, click Add to create a new schedule. 5. In the Scheduling window, configure automatic delivery settings as follows: a. Click the Schedule on link and create a schedule according to which the report should be generated. To follow this example, schedule the report to run on a weekly basis. b. Click the Recipient link. c. In the Select Recipient window, click Advanced. d. In the Advanced window, specify advanced scheduling options. In the Path field, enter the path to the folder where the generated report will be stored. In the File Name field, specify the location of the script file. To follow this example, enter C:\reports in the Path field and enter C:\reports\postdelivery.bat in the File Name field. 324 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

325 6. Save the scheduling settings. The report will be generated and copied in accordance with the specified schedule. At the specified schedule time, Veeam ONE Reporter will automatically generate the report. After the report is created, Veeam ONE Reporter will trigger the script that will copy the report to network shares. 325 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

326 Example B. Sorting Reports by Name Consider the following scenario: you want to schedule a weekly delivery for a set of reports. After the reports are created, you want to save each report to a separate folder with the report name. To sort reports into folders by report name, you can take the following steps: 1. Create a folder that will group a set of necessary reports. 2. Save reports with the necessary parameters into the folder. 3. Create a script that will sort the generated reports. 4. Set the necessary schedule for the folder and specify the post-delivery script. Step 1. Create a Folder Create a report folder as described in section Creating Folders. The folder will be used to group a set of reports that you want to create on a scheduled basis. Step 2. Save Reports Save reports with the necessary parameters as described in section Saving Reports. Step 3. Create a Script When you schedule a report delivery for set of reports in a folder, Veeam ONE Reporter saves the reports to a target location by the following path: <TargetDirectory>\reporting-task-for-folder-<FolderName><ID>\ The sample script must perform the following operations: 1. Access the target report location: C:\reports\reporting-task-for-folder-<FolderName><ID>\ 2. For every generated report, retrieve the report name and copy the report to a folder with the report name: C:\share\myreports\%ReportName%\ To create a folder with the report name, the script will use the %ReportName% parameter. 3. Remove the reports from the target location and delete the target directory. An example of the script is provided below: ::Changing directory to the target report location cd reporting-task-for-folder* set RD=%cd% ::Removing extension and date from the report file name set ReportName=%~n1 set Extension=%~x1 set FolderName=%ReportName:~0,-11% ::Copying the report to a folder with the report name echo f xcopy %1 "c:\share\myreports\%foldername%\%reportname%%extension%" /y ::Removing the target report location cd..\ rd %RD% /s/q Save the script as a Windows batch file on the machine where Veeam ONE is installed. To follow this example, save the script with the postdelivery.bat name to the C:\reports\ directory. 326 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

327 Step 4. Configure Scheduling Settings Configure scheduling settings for the saved report as follows: 1. In Veeam ONE Reporter, open the Workspace section. 2. Select the folder that contains the necessary set of reports. 3. Click Schedule Folder on the toolbar at the top of the reports list. 4. In the Scheduling Folder Administration window, click Add to create a new schedule. 5. In the Scheduling window, configure automatic delivery settings as follows: a. Click the Schedule on link and create a schedule according to which the report should be generated. To follow this example, schedule the report to run on a weekly basis. b. Click the Recipient link. c. In the Select Recipient window, click Advanced. d. In the Advanced window, specify advanced scheduling options. In the Path field, enter the path to the folder where the generated report will be stored. In the File Name field, specify the location of the script file. To follow this example, enter C:\reports in the Path field. In the File Name field, enter the path to the script and pass the report name parameter to the script: C:\reports\postdelivery.bat %ReportName% 6. Save the scheduling settings. 327 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

328 At the specified schedule time, Veeam ONE Reporter will automatically generate the reports. When a report is created, Veeam ONE Reporter will trigger the script that will copy the report to a separate folder. 328 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

329 Appendix E. Grouping Expressions Syntax and Examples The syntax used in the expressions has the following limitations: Logical items (CASE expressions) should not be nested (it is not allowed to use a CASE expression in another CASE expression). However, you can use methods to define values in a CASE expression. Methods should not be used in a CustomAttribute expression to define the custom attribute name. However, a CustomAttribute expression can be used to define values in methods. Example 1. Group VMs by Guest Operating System To automatically group all your VMs by their guest OS s: 1. Create a dynamic group type category for VMs and name it Guest OS. 2. Select this category among the tabs in the Groups section, click Grouping Expression and specify the following expression for it: GuestOS 3. As a result, the Guest OS category tab will display a list of groups of VMs divided by the guest OSes they are running. 329 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

330 Example 2. Group Datastores by Type To automatically group all your storage devices by the type of file system: 1. Create a dynamic group type category for datastores and name it File System Type. 2. Select this category among the tabs in the Groups section, click Grouping Expression and specify the following expression for it: FileSystemType 3. As a result, the File System Type category tab will contain a list of groups of storage devices divided by the file system type they use. 330 Veeam ONE USER GUIDE VMWARE VSPHERE REV 5

Veeam ONE. Version 8.0. Deployment Guide

Veeam ONE. Version 8.0. Deployment Guide Veeam ONE Version 8.0 Deployment Guide April, 2015 2015 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,

More information

Veeam Universal Application Item Recovery

Veeam Universal Application Item Recovery Veeam Universal Application Item Recovery Version 9.5 User Guide November, 2016 2016 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this publication

More information

Veeam Backup & Replication

Veeam Backup & Replication Veeam Backup & Replication Version 9.x Application Events February, 2017 1 Veeam Backup & Replication Application Events REV 1 2017 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property

More information

Veeam Cloud Connect. Version 8.0. Administrator Guide

Veeam Cloud Connect. Version 8.0. Administrator Guide Veeam Cloud Connect Version 8.0 Administrator Guide June, 2015 2015 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

More information

Veeam Backup & Replication for VMware vsphere

Veeam Backup & Replication for VMware vsphere Veeam Backup & Replication for VMware vsphere Version 9.5 Evaluator's Guide December, 2017 2017 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part

More information

Veeam Backup & Replication

Veeam Backup & Replication Veeam Backup & Replication Version 9.5 Veeam Agent Management Guide December, 2017 2017 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this

More information

vcenter Operations Manager for Horizon View Administration

vcenter Operations Manager for Horizon View Administration vcenter Operations Manager for Horizon View Administration vcenter Operations Manager for Horizon View 1.5 vcenter Operations Manager for Horizon View 1.5.1 This document supports the version of each product

More information

Veeam Backup & Replication. Version 9.0

Veeam Backup & Replication. Version 9.0 Veeam Backup & Replication Version 9.0 May, 2016 2016 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,

More information

All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2017 5nine Software Inc. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval

More information

Pure Storage FlashArray Management Pack for VMware vrealize Operations Manager User Guide. (Version with Purity 4.9.

Pure Storage FlashArray Management Pack for VMware vrealize Operations Manager User Guide. (Version with Purity 4.9. Pure Storage FlashArray Management Pack for VMware vrealize Operations Manager User Guide (Version 1.0.139 with Purity 4.9.x or higher) Sunday, November 27, 2016 16:13 Pure Storage FlashArray Management

More information

PHD Virtual Backup Exporter. version 6.5 Users Guide. Document Release Date: August 26,

PHD Virtual Backup Exporter. version 6.5 Users Guide. Document Release Date: August 26, PHD Virtual Backup Exporter version 6.5 Users Guide Document Release Date: August 26, 2013 www.phdvirtual.com i PHD Virtual Backup Exporter - Users Guide Legal Notices PHD Virtual Backup Exporter Users

More information

vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 2.0

vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 2.0 vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 2.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition.

More information

vcloud Director Administrator's Guide

vcloud Director Administrator's Guide vcloud Director 5.1.1 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition. To check for more recent editions of

More information

Dell Storage Compellent Integration Tools for VMware

Dell Storage Compellent Integration Tools for VMware Dell Storage Compellent Integration Tools for VMware Administrator s Guide Version 3.1 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your

More information

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.4 Installation vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.4 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports

More information

efolder BDR for Veeam VMware Continuity Cloud Guide

efolder BDR for Veeam VMware Continuity Cloud Guide efolder BDR for Veeam VMware Continuity Cloud Guide Setup Continuity Cloud Import Backup Copy Job Restore Your VM Accessing the Continuity Cloud Host uh6 efolder BDR Guide for Veeam Page 1 of 36 INTRODUCTION

More information

vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication 6.5

vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication 6.5 vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication 6.5 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you have comments

More information

Dell Storage Compellent Integration Tools for VMware

Dell Storage Compellent Integration Tools for VMware Dell Storage Compellent Integration Tools for VMware Version 4.0 Administrator s Guide Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your

More information

Installing and Configuring vcloud Connector

Installing and Configuring vcloud Connector Installing and Configuring vcloud Connector vcloud Connector 2.6.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new

More information

vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud

vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication 6.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced

More information

Installing and Configuring vcloud Connector

Installing and Configuring vcloud Connector Installing and Configuring vcloud Connector vcloud Connector 2.5.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new

More information

Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents

Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents vsphere 5.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced

More information

User s Manual. Version 5

User s Manual. Version 5 User s Manual Version 5 Copyright 2017 Safeway. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language,

More information

vcenter Support Assistant User's Guide

vcenter Support Assistant User's Guide vcenter Support Assistant 6.5 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition. To check for more recent editions

More information

Veeam Backup & Replication Version 6.0

Veeam Backup & Replication Version 6.0 Veeam Backup & Replication Version 6.0 Evaluator s Guide VMware Environments March, 2012 2012 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of

More information

Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator s Guide ESX Server 3.0 and VirtualCenter 2.0

Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator s Guide ESX Server 3.0 and VirtualCenter 2.0 Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator s Guide ESX Server 3.0 and VirtualCenter 2.0 Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator s Guide Revision: 20060615 Item: VI-ENG-Q206-217 You can find

More information

Using vrealize Operations Tenant App as a Service Provider

Using vrealize Operations Tenant App as a Service Provider Using vrealize Operations Tenant App as a Service Provider Using vrealize Operations Tenant App as a Service Provider You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware Web site at:

More information

vrealize Operations Manager Customization and Administration Guide vrealize Operations Manager 6.4

vrealize Operations Manager Customization and Administration Guide vrealize Operations Manager 6.4 vrealize Operations Manager Customization and Administration Guide vrealize Operations Manager 6.4 vrealize Operations Manager Customization and Administration Guide You can find the most up-to-date technical

More information

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation. VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.5

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation. VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.5 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.5 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/

More information

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation. VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.3

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation. VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.3 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.3 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Installation You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation

More information

KYOCERA Net Admin User Guide

KYOCERA Net Admin User Guide KYOCERA Net Admin User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable

More information

vcenter Support Assistant User's Guide

vcenter Support Assistant User's Guide vcenter Support Assistant 6.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition. To check for more recent editions

More information

Veeam Backup & Replication

Veeam Backup & Replication Veeam Backup & Replication for Microsoft Hyper-V Version 9.0 Evaluator's Guide January, 2016 2016 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part

More information

vcloud Director Administrator's Guide

vcloud Director Administrator's Guide vcloud Director 5.5 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition. To check for more recent editions of

More information

EMCO Ping Monitor Enterprise 6. Copyright EMCO. All rights reserved.

EMCO Ping Monitor Enterprise 6. Copyright EMCO. All rights reserved. Copyright 2001-2017 EMCO. All rights reserved. Company web site: emcosoftware.com Support e-mail: support@emcosoftware.com Table of Contents Chapter... 1: Introduction 4 Chapter... 2: Getting Started 6

More information

Getting Started with ESX Server 3i Installable Update 2 and later for ESX Server 3i version 3.5 Installable and VirtualCenter 2.5

Getting Started with ESX Server 3i Installable Update 2 and later for ESX Server 3i version 3.5 Installable and VirtualCenter 2.5 Getting Started with ESX Server 3i Installable Update 2 and later for ESX Server 3i version 3.5 Installable and VirtualCenter 2.5 Getting Started with ESX Server 3i Installable Revision: 20090313 Item:

More information

VMware vrealize Operations Management Pack for vcloud Director 4.5 Guide

VMware vrealize Operations Management Pack for vcloud Director 4.5 Guide VMware vrealize Operations Management Pack for Director 4.5 Guide This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new

More information

VMware vfabric Data Director Installation Guide

VMware vfabric Data Director Installation Guide VMware vfabric Data Director Installation Guide vfabric Data Director 1.0.1 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced

More information

Synchronization Agent Configuration Guide

Synchronization Agent Configuration Guide SafeNet Authentication Service Synchronization Agent Configuration Guide 1 Document Information Document Part Number 007-012848-001, Rev. E Release Date July 2015 Applicability This version of the SAS

More information

Scalable Licensing with Selective Monitoring in VMware vrealize Operations

Scalable Licensing with Selective Monitoring in VMware vrealize Operations VMware vcloud Architecture Toolkit for Service Providers Scalable Licensing with Selective Monitoring in VMware vrealize Operations Version 2.9 January 2018 Brandon Gordon 2018 VMware, Inc. All rights

More information

Centerity Monitor User Guide

Centerity Monitor User Guide Centerity Monitor 4.10 User Guide July 2018 Page 2 End-User License Agreement (EULA) This guide and the use of Centerity software is subject to Centerity s End-User License Agreement (EULA). A copy of

More information

VMware vrealize Operations Management Pack for vcloud Director 5.0 Guide

VMware vrealize Operations Management Pack for vcloud Director 5.0 Guide VMware vrealize Operations Management Pack for vcloud Director 5.0 Guide You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you have comments

More information

vshield Administration Guide

vshield Administration Guide vshield Manager 5.1 vshield App 5.1 vshield Edge 5.1 vshield Endpoint 5.1 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by

More information

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration. Modified on 3 JUL 2018 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.4

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration. Modified on 3 JUL 2018 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.4 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration Modified on 3 JUL 2018 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.4 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at:

More information

Dell Storage Integration Tools for VMware

Dell Storage Integration Tools for VMware Dell Storage Integration Tools for VMware Version 4.1 Administrator s Guide Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION:

More information

Setting Up the Dell DR Series System on Veeam

Setting Up the Dell DR Series System on Veeam Setting Up the Dell DR Series System on Veeam Dell Engineering April 2016 A Dell Technical White Paper Revisions Date January 2014 May 2014 July 2014 April 2015 June 2015 November 2015 April 2016 Description

More information

Management Console User Guide

Management Console User Guide Secure Web Gateway Management Console User Guide Release 10.2.0 Manual Version v 10.2.0.1 M86 SECURITY SECURE WEB GATEWAY MANAGEMENT CONSOLE USER GUIDE 2012 M86 Security All rights reserved. 828 W. Taft

More information

VMware Skyline Collector Installation and Configuration Guide. VMware Skyline 1.4

VMware Skyline Collector Installation and Configuration Guide. VMware Skyline 1.4 VMware Skyline Collector Installation and Configuration Guide VMware Skyline 1.4 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you have

More information

Contents George Road, Tampa, FL

Contents George Road, Tampa, FL 1 Contents CONTACTING VEEAM SOFTWARE... 5 Customer Support... 5 Online Support... 5 Company Contacts... 5 About this Guide... 6 About VEEAM Endpoint Backup For LabTech... 7 How It Works... 8 Discovery...

More information

Version 2.3 User Guide

Version 2.3 User Guide V Mware vcloud Usage Meter Version 2.3 User Guide 2012 VMware, Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws. This product is covered

More information

Data Protection Guide

Data Protection Guide SnapCenter Software 4.0 Data Protection Guide For VMs and Datastores using the SnapCenter Plug-in for VMware vsphere March 2018 215-12931_C0 doccomments@netapp.com Table of Contents 3 Contents Deciding

More information

Acronis Data Cloud Version 7.8

Acronis Data Cloud Version 7.8 Acronis Data Cloud Version 7.8 PARTNER'S GUIDE Revision: 10/5/2018 Table of contents 1 About this document...3 2 About Acronis Data Cloud...3 2.1 Services and offerings... 3 2.2 User accounts and tenants...

More information

Quest VROOM Quick Setup Guide for Quest Rapid Recovery for Windows and Quest Foglight vapp Installers

Quest VROOM Quick Setup Guide for Quest Rapid Recovery for Windows and Quest Foglight vapp Installers Quest VROOM Quick Setup Guide for Quest Rapid Recovery for Windows and Quest Foglight vapp Installers INTRODUCTION Setup of Quest VROOM requires installation of Rapid Recovery and Foglight for Virtualization

More information

vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 3.0

vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 3.0 vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 3.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition.

More information

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration. 20 SEP 2018 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.6

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration. 20 SEP 2018 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.6 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration 20 SEP 2018 VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.6 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/

More information

Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide

Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Documentation version: 18 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo are

More information

Configuration Note. AudioCodes One Voice for Microsoft Skype for Business. CloudBond 365. Backup and Restore Functionality. Version 9.

Configuration Note. AudioCodes One Voice for Microsoft Skype for Business. CloudBond 365. Backup and Restore Functionality. Version 9. 7 Configuration Note AudioCodes One Voice for Microsoft Skype for Business CloudBond 365 Backup and Restore Functionality Version 9.5 Update 4 Configuration Note Contents Table of Contents 1 Introduction...

More information

Runecast Analyzer User Guide

Runecast Analyzer User Guide Runecast Analyzer User Guide V1.0 Copyright 2014-2017 Runecast Solutions Ltd. All rights reserved. 2 P a g e Contents 1 Installation and Setup... 5 1.1 System requirements... 5 1.2 Deployment... 6 1.3

More information

vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication 8.1

vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication 8.1 vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication 8.1 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you have comments

More information

vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud

vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication for Disaster Recovery to Cloud vsphere Replication 5.6 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced

More information

Veeam Endpoint Backup

Veeam Endpoint Backup Veeam Endpoint Backup Version 1.5 User Guide March, 2016 2016 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

More information

efolder BDR for Veeam Hyper-V Continuity Cloud Guide Setup Continuity Cloud Import Backup Copy Job Restore Your VM

efolder BDR for Veeam Hyper-V Continuity Cloud Guide Setup Continuity Cloud Import Backup Copy Job Restore Your VM efolder BDR for Veeam Hyper-V Continuity Cloud Guide Setup Continuity Cloud Import Backup Copy Job Restore Your VM efolder BDR Guide for Veeam Page 1 of 36 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the efolder

More information

vrealize Automation Management Pack 2.0 Guide

vrealize Automation Management Pack 2.0 Guide vrealize Automation Management Pack 2.0 Guide This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition. To check for

More information

Basic Configuration Installation Guide

Basic Configuration Installation Guide EMC RecoverPoint for VMs 5.0 Basic Configuration Installation Guide P/N 302-003-534 REV 01 December 7, 2016 This document contains information on these topics: Revision History... 2 Overview... 3 Reference

More information

HP Operations Manager

HP Operations Manager HP Operations Manager Software Version: 9.22 UNIX and Linux operating systems Java GUI Operator s Guide Document Release Date: December 2016 Software Release Date: December 2016 Legal Notices Warranty

More information

Setting Up the DR Series System on Veeam

Setting Up the DR Series System on Veeam Setting Up the DR Series System on Veeam Quest Engineering June 2017 A Quest Technical White Paper Revisions Date January 2014 May 2014 July 2014 April 2015 June 2015 November 2015 April 2016 Description

More information

Secure Web Gateway. SWG User Guide. Release Manual Version v

Secure Web Gateway. SWG User Guide. Release Manual Version v Secure Web Gateway SWG User Guide Release 10.2.0 Manual Version v 10.2.0.1 M86 SECURITY SECURE WEB GATEWAY SWG USER GUIDE 2012 M86 Security All rights reserved. 828 W. Taft Ave., Orange, CA 92865, USA

More information

UDP Director Virtual Edition Installation and Configuration Guide (for Stealthwatch System v6.9.0)

UDP Director Virtual Edition Installation and Configuration Guide (for Stealthwatch System v6.9.0) UDP Director Virtual Edition Installation and Configuration Guide (for Stealthwatch System v6.9.0) Installation and Configuration Guide: UDP Director VE v6.9.0 2016 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.

More information

vcloud Director Administrator's Guide vcloud Director 8.10

vcloud Director Administrator's Guide vcloud Director 8.10 vcloud Director Administrator's Guide vcloud Director 8.10 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you have comments about this documentation,

More information

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.2 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document

More information

Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents

Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents Modified on 27 JUL 2017 vsphere Web Services SDK 6.5 vcenter Server 6.5 VMware ESXi 6.5 Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions,

More information

OpenManage Integration for VMware vcenter Quick Installation Guide for vsphere Web Client Version 3.2

OpenManage Integration for VMware vcenter Quick Installation Guide for vsphere Web Client Version 3.2 OpenManage Integration for VMware vcenter Quick Installation Guide for vsphere Web Client Version 3.2 Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better

More information

Basic System Administration ESX Server and Virtual Center 2.0.1

Basic System Administration ESX Server and Virtual Center 2.0.1 ESX Server 3.0.1 and Virtual Center 2.0.1 Basic System Administration Revision: 2006105 Item: VI-ENG-Q306-293 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on our Web site at http://www.vmware.com/support/

More information

Veeam Agent for Microsoft Windows

Veeam Agent for Microsoft Windows Veeam Agent for Microsoft Windows Version 2.1 User Guide December, 2017 2017 Veeam Software. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective owners. No part of this publication

More information

Data Protection Guide

Data Protection Guide SnapCenter Software 4.1 Data Protection Guide For VMs and Datastores using the SnapCenter Plug-in for VMware vsphere September 2018 215-13399_B0 doccomments@netapp.com Table of Contents 3 Contents Deciding

More information

vrealize Suite Lifecycle Manager 1.0 Installation and Management vrealize Suite 2017

vrealize Suite Lifecycle Manager 1.0 Installation and Management vrealize Suite 2017 vrealize Suite Lifecycle Manager 1.0 Installation and Management vrealize Suite 2017 vrealize Suite Lifecycle Manager 1.0 Installation and Management You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation

More information

Getting Started with ESXi Embedded

Getting Started with ESXi Embedded ESXi 4.0 Embedded vcenter Server 4.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition. To check for more recent

More information

ForeScout Extended Module for Qualys VM

ForeScout Extended Module for Qualys VM ForeScout Extended Module for Qualys VM Version 1.2.1 Table of Contents About the Qualys VM Integration... 3 Additional Qualys VM Documentation... 3 About This Module... 3 Components... 4 Considerations...

More information

Setting Up Quest QoreStor with Veeam Backup & Replication. Technical White Paper

Setting Up Quest QoreStor with Veeam Backup & Replication. Technical White Paper Setting Up Quest QoreStor with Veeam Backup & Replication Technical White Paper Quest Engineering August 2018 2018 Quest Software Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THIS WHITE PAPER IS FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES

More information

Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents

Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents vsphere 6.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced

More information

IBM Spectrum Protect Plus Version Installation and User's Guide IBM

IBM Spectrum Protect Plus Version Installation and User's Guide IBM IBM Spectrum Protect Plus Version 10.1.1 Installation and User's Guide IBM Note: Before you use this information and the product it supports, read the information in Notices on page 119. Third edition

More information

Management Portal Version 7.7

Management Portal Version 7.7 Management Portal Version 7.7 ADMINISTRATOR'S GUIDE Revision: 7/2/2018 Table of contents 1 About this document...3 2 About the management portal...3 2.1 Accounts and units... 3 2.2 Supported web browsers...

More information

Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents. 17 APR 2018 vsphere Web Services SDK 6.7 vcenter Server 6.7 VMware ESXi 6.

Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents. 17 APR 2018 vsphere Web Services SDK 6.7 vcenter Server 6.7 VMware ESXi 6. Developing and Deploying vsphere Solutions, vservices, and ESX Agents 17 APR 2018 vsphere Web Services SDK 6.7 vcenter Server 6.7 VMware ESXi 6.7 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation

More information

Synchronization Agent Configuration Guide

Synchronization Agent Configuration Guide SafeNet Authentication Service Synchronization Agent Configuration Guide 1 Document Information Document Part Number 007-012848-001, Rev. B Release Date March 2015 Applicability This version of the SAS

More information

Veritas NetBackup Plug-in for VMware vsphere Web Client Guide. Release 8.1.1

Veritas NetBackup Plug-in for VMware vsphere Web Client Guide. Release 8.1.1 Veritas NetBackup Plug-in for VMware vsphere Web Client Guide Release 8.1.1 Veritas NetBackup Plug-in for VMware vsphere Web Client Guide Last updated: 2018-02-16 Document version:netbackup 8.1.1 Legal

More information

vcloud Director User's Guide 04 OCT 2018 vcloud Director 9.5

vcloud Director User's Guide 04 OCT 2018 vcloud Director 9.5 vcloud Director User's Guide 04 OCT 2018 vcloud Director 9.5 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware website at: https://docs.vmware.com/ If you have comments about this

More information

Mission Control for the Microsoft Cloud. 5nine Cloud Security. Web Portal Version 12.o. Getting Started Guide

Mission Control for the Microsoft Cloud. 5nine Cloud Security. Web Portal Version 12.o. Getting Started Guide Mission Control for the Microsoft Cloud 5nine Cloud Security Web Portal Version 12.o Getting Started Guide 2018 5nine Software Inc. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of their respective

More information

RealPresence Platform Director

RealPresence Platform Director RealPresence CloudAXIS Suite Administrators Guide Software 1.3.1 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE Software 1.8 December 2014 3725-66008-001 Rev C RealPresence Platform Director Polycom, Inc. 1 Copyright 2014, Polycom,

More information

Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator s Guide Update 2 and later for ESX Server 3.5 and VirtualCenter 2.5

Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator s Guide Update 2 and later for ESX Server 3.5 and VirtualCenter 2.5 Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator s Guide Update 2 and later for ESX Server 3.5 and VirtualCenter 2.5 Virtual Infrastructure Web Access Administrator s Guide Virtual Infrastructure Web Access

More information

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.3 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document

More information

VMware vcenter AppSpeed User s Guide AppSpeed 1.0 EN

VMware vcenter AppSpeed User s Guide AppSpeed 1.0 EN VMware vcenter AppSpeed User s Guide AppSpeed 1.0 EN-000213-01 VMware vcenter AppSpeed User s Guide You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware Web site at: http://www.vmware.com/support/

More information

Installing and Configuring vcenter Support Assistant

Installing and Configuring vcenter Support Assistant Installing and Configuring vcenter Support Assistant vcenter Support Assistant 6.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced

More information

HP OneView for VMware vcenter User Guide

HP OneView for VMware vcenter User Guide HP OneView for VMware vcenter User Guide Abstract This document contains detailed instructions for configuring and using HP OneView for VMware vcenter (formerly HP Insight Control for VMware vcenter Server).

More information

Using the Horizon vcenter Orchestrator Plug-In. VMware Horizon 6 6.0

Using the Horizon vcenter Orchestrator Plug-In. VMware Horizon 6 6.0 Using the Horizon vcenter Orchestrator Plug-In VMware Horizon 6 6.0 You can find the most up-to-date technical documentation on the VMware Web site at: https://docs.vmware.com/ The VMware Web site also

More information

One Identity Active Roles 7.2. Web Interface Administrator Guide

One Identity Active Roles 7.2. Web Interface Administrator Guide One Identity Active Roles 7.2 Web Interface Administrator Guide Copyright 2017 One Identity LLC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright. The software described

More information

Getting Started with Prime Network

Getting Started with Prime Network CHAPTER 1 These topics provide some basic steps for getting started with Prime Network, such as how to set up the system and the basic parts of the Prime Network Administration GUI client. Basic Steps

More information

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration

VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration VMware vrealize Operations for Horizon Administration vrealize Operations for Horizon 6.4 vrealize Operations Manager 6.4 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent

More information

Basic Configuration Installation Guide

Basic Configuration Installation Guide RecoverPoint for VMs 5.1 Basic Configuration Installation Guide P/N 302-003-975 REV 1 July 4, 2017 This document contains information on these topics: Revision History... 2 Overview... 3 Reference architecture...

More information

HPE OneView for VMware vcenter User Guide

HPE OneView for VMware vcenter User Guide HPE OneView for VMware vcenter User Guide Abstract This document contains detailed instructions for configuring and using HPE OneView for VMware vcenter. It is intended for system administrators who are

More information

vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 3.5.0

vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 3.5.0 vrealize Operations Management Pack for NSX for vsphere 3.5.0 This document supports the version of each product listed and supports all subsequent versions until the document is replaced by a new edition.

More information